<?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?><?xml-stylesheet href="http://www.blogger.com/styles/atom.css" type="text/css"?><feed xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom' xmlns:openSearch='http://a9.com/-/spec/opensearchrss/1.0/' xmlns:georss='http://www.georss.org/georss' xmlns:gd='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005' xmlns:thr='http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0'><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107</id><updated>2011-07-07T23:07:32.304-07:00</updated><title type='text'>shadi</title><subtitle type='html'></subtitle><link rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#feed' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/posts/default'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default?max-results=100'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/'/><link rel='hub' href='http://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com/'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><generator version='7.00' uri='http://www.blogger.com'>Blogger</generator><openSearch:totalResults>16</openSearch:totalResults><openSearch:startIndex>1</openSearch:startIndex><openSearch:itemsPerPage>100</openSearch:itemsPerPage><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-4674933214706699703</id><published>2009-07-08T10:34:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T10:38:09.415-07:00</updated><title type='text'></title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Fluid power accessories &lt;/h2&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Miscellaneous items&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some components used in fluid power systems do not necessarily fall into any  of the categories discussed in preceding chapters. These accessory items may be  used for powering, modifying, monitoring, or connecting in any type circuit, as  the system designer deems appropriate. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pneumatic accessories&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Quick exhaust valves: The speed at which an air cylinder strokes is  determined by how fast compressed air enters it and how fast the air already in  the cylinder exhausts to atmosphere. System pressure drives air into the  cylinder and this does not pose a speed problem in most circuits. Air leaving  the cylinder is different because it was at system pressure when the directional  valve shifted. Although the air starts exiting quickly, it still holds the  piston back. Speeding up a sluggish air-operated cylinder is best accomplished  by dealing with its exhaust air. The cross-sectional view and symbol in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-1&lt;/b&gt; illustrate a quick exhaust valve, which does just that. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="349"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-1. Quick-exhaust valve increases air cylinder's  stroking speed &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996181gif_00000044840.gif" width="349" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cylinder in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-1&lt;/b&gt; delivers high impact from low force . . .  stamping parts with steel dies and leaving a lasting impression. Cylinder force  alone is not capable of making the desired impression -- if any impression at  all. Accelerating piston speed over a few inches of travel makes the weight of  the tooling act like a hammer swung through the air. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the cylinder retracts and is held at rest, the shut-off wafer covers the  exhaust port and forces air to the cylinder rod end. When the directional valve  shifts to extend the cylinder, pressure drops on the left side of the shut-off  wafer and trapped pressure in the cylinder forces the wafer to the left. As the  shut-off wafer moves left, it closes off flow to the valve and opens a direct  path to atmosphere only a short distance from the cylinder port. The rapid  exhaust of air reduces backpressure on the cylinder piston, allowing  high-pressure inlet air to accelerate and move the piston very quickly. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Any time slowly exhausting air is a problem, look to a quick exhaust valve to  remedy the situation. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Mufflers: The air-exhaust mufflers in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-2&lt;/b&gt; reduce the noise  level of air-operated equipment. They are made in several different  configurations out of many types of material, but the end result of all of them  is the smooth discharge of air. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="256"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-2. Typical pneumatic mufflers &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996182gif_00000044841.gif" width="256" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The sintered-bronze elements on the left are similar to filters made of the  same material. They separate the flowing air into numerous paths to lessen or  eliminate the loud crash of air as it leaves an actuator. The sintered-bronze  element in the center has a protective metal covering and an adjustable poppet  valve to control flow. It works as an inexpensive meter-out flow control when  used with a 5-way directional control valve. Because a 5-way valve has two  exhaust ports, these speed-control mufflers can regulate speed independently in  both directions of travel. The muffler on the right is similar to those used on  internal combustion engines. It may be made of plastic or aluminum. It is bulky,  but causes less restriction on fast-moving actuators. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Accessory Items for pneumatics and hydraulics&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The components described in the rest of this chapter are common to hydraulics  or pneumatics. The main difference between them is the materials used to make  them. Many pneumatic components can be made of plastic or aluminum to resist  corrosion and keep cost down. These materials work well at low pressure. Most  hydraulic components see high to very high pressure and need to be much more  robust. Cast iron and steel are common materials for hydraulic parts due to  their strength and the absence of corrosion. Aluminum is also preferred by some  because of its light weight.  &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Pressure gauges: The gauges shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-3&lt;/b&gt; come in a variety of  shapes, sizes, and designs. The most common is the round model that has a moving  needle to designate system pressure. The round gauge on the left and the plunger  gauge measure psig, not atmospheric pressure. Because atmospheric pressure is in  and around an actuator, it doesn't help or hinder performance, so it is not  important when determining the amount of work being done. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="356"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-3. Four types of pressure gauges &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996183gif_00000044842.gif" width="356" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The gauge marked PSIA reads atmospheric pressure instead of zero and can be  used to check vacuum as well as pressure. Some of these gauges set on zero and  read psi clockwise and vacuum (in inches of mercury) counter-clockwise. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Other designs include battery-operated digital-readout units. These gauges  are accurate and very fast reading. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Temperature: Knowledge of the temperature of a fluid or the atmosphere in  which it works can be very important. Two styles of temperature gauge are shown  in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-4&lt;/b&gt;. When pneumatically operated machines are in atmospheres  of 32° F or less, the condensed moisture in them may freeze. When hydraulic  circuits operate much above 140° F they can leak or slow down and the fluid in  them starts to break down. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="262"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-4. Temperature gauges &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996184gif_00000044843.gif" width="262" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;It is best to keep hydraulic systems between 75° and 130° F. Temperatures  above 130° F can vaporize important additives and cause excessive bypass due to  reduced fluid viscosity. Fluid temperatures below 75° F can result in sluggish  performance. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Flow meters: The cross-sectional view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-5&lt;/b&gt; shows a typical  inline flow meter that indicates flow in cubic feet per minute (cfm), gallons  per minute (gpm), or liters per minute (lpm). This style of meter is made of  aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel to allow the magnet-powered notched  steel ring to function. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="355"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-5. Cross-sectional view of flow meter &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996185gif_00000044844.gif" width="355" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Fluid entering from the left passes through flow holes and against a  spring-returned piston fitted with magnets. This piston wraps around a tapered  metering cone and has a sharp-edged orifice in contact with it. The only way for  fluid to get through is to push the spring-returned piston with magnets to the  right. When the piston moves far enough up the tapered metering cone to allow  the present rate of fluid to pass, it stops and holds. The magnets in the piston  draw the notched steel ring along and the notch reads the flow amount on the  clear-plastic cover with flow scales. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This type flow meter is not completely accurate but gives a clear enough  indication of flow to meet most troubleshooting needs. Other designs are more  accurate but less tolerant of the harsh interaction of a high flow system. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The upper symbol on the right in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-5&lt;/b&gt; is for a device that only  shows whether flow is taking place in the line or not. The middle symbol  represents the cross-sectioned device. It indicates both the presence of flow  and the flow rate. The lower symbol represents a device that shows the flow rate  and keeps a running total of the amount that has passed through it. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Shuttle valves: The circuits in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-6&lt;/b&gt; illustrate one reason for  using shuttle valves. The spring-return cylinder in the upper circuit must be  controlled from three locations. This circuit uses pipe tees to interconnect the  three normally closed, palm-button-operated, 3-way directional control valves  with the cylinder. The only problem is this circuit will not work. When any of  the 3-way valves are actuated, input air can flow directly to atmosphere through  the other 3-way valves, bypassing the cylinder. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="346"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-6. Cylinder circuits with shuttle valves &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996186gif_00000044845.gif" width="346" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The lower circuit uses shuttle valves in place of the pipe tees. Air from any  of the 3-way directional control valves can only go to the cylinder. The  floating ball in the shuttle valve blocks air to the other directional control  valves. Exhausting air can go to atmosphere through the valve it entered, go out  the opposite valve, or exhaust through both valves. If each 3-way directional  control valve has a different pressure at its inlet (as indicated), the cylinder  always gets the highest pressure of the valves actuated. The ball in the shuttle  valve always moves away from the highest inlet pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Other circuits use shuttle valves to send more than one pilot signal to a  directional control valve, read feedback signals from more than one source, or  send signals from multiple actuators to a load-sensing pump. Any time multiple  inputs are necessary, a shuttle valve will separate them, allow for return flow,  and pass the highest input pressure. (Check valves can serve two of these  functions but will not allow back flow.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Rotary unions: Some applications require fluid to flow into or out of  rotating parts of a machine. The rotation may be continuous or only part of a  turn; the application may have one or many flow paths. Many manufacturers make  rotary unions that do this for fluids at pressures as high as 5000 psi, with as  many as 20 flow paths. . (Some rotary unions pass electricity as well as fluids  if required.) The cross-sectional view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-7&lt;/b&gt; is a simplified  drawing of a single-path rotary union. The symbol is a circle on a flow line; in  this case, the energy triangle indicates hydraulic fluid. Multiple flow paths  are shown by multiple lines of whatever type the flow is. (Some rotary unions  pass electricity as well as fluids if required.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="260"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-7. Cross-section of rotary union &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996187gif_00000044846.gif" width="260" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Quick disconnects: When all or any part of a pneumatic or hydraulic circuit  must be removed or changed frequently, a fast way to do so is with  quick-disconnect couplings. Quick disconnects usually require a worker to  connect and disconnect them manually. However, there are some styles that break  away when pulled by mechanical force. Other types only stay connected while held  in place by an external force. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cross-sectional view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-8&lt;/b&gt; illustrates the  socket-and-plug pair that make up a typical quick disconnect. Sliding the  lock-unlock ring to the left allows the detent balls to move out of the way so  the plug can be inserted. Inserting the plug all the way into the socket stops  leakage as it passes the O-ring seal, opens both check valves, and allows the  detent balls to lock in the detent notch to hold the connection together.  Sliding the lock-unlock ring to the left again releases the plug as the detent  balls lose their backing. The three symbols in the figure show quick disconnects  disconnected with dual check valves, connected with dual check valves, and  disconnected in a typical air line configuration. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="361"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-8. Cross-section of typical quick disconnect coupling  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996188gif_00000044847.gif" width="361" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;It may be necessary to install oversized quick disconnects because their  construction can cause high backpressure. Always check pressure drop in the  manufacturer's catalog to assure proper flow capabilities. There are designs  that have full flow porting in air and low-pressure hydraulic styles. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pressure switches: Some fluid power circuits require electrical control  signals when pressure reaches specific levels - such as the pressure buildup  when a part is clamped or a certain weight is met - or if overpressure may cause  damage or is a safety hazard. (Sequence valves -- discussed in Chapter 14 -- can  cycle from a pressure buildup, but will not produce a signal to an electrical  control circuit when a pressure requirement is satisfied.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cross-sectional view and symbols in Fig 18-9 show electrical pressure  switches that are set to monitor maximum or minimum pressure and then send a  signal to the electric control circuit. (Another electrical output device that  reads pressure and sends a signal is a pressure transducer. Pressure transducers  are more responsive and have better repeatability, but require additional  electronics to read their input.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="261"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-9. Cross-section of pressure switch &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/68996189gif_00000044848.gif" width="261" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The depicted pressure switch includes a plunger that reacts to system  pressure by moving. An adjusting screw sets spring pressures against the plunger  and allows different settings. When system pressure is high enough to push the  plunger upward against spring tension, the plunger closes a limit switch to  signal that the set pressure has been reached. When pressure falls, the plunger  drops and the limit switch opens again. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Never depend on a pressure switch to indicate actuator position when the  actuator positively has to be in a certain position to prevent machine or  product damage or to avoid a safety hazard. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Limit switches: &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-10&lt;/b&gt; shows an outline drawing and symbols for  a limit switch. While some electrical components are shown to indicate function  and location, no wiring appears on fluid power circuit diagrams. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="174"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-10. Limit switch &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/689961810gif_00000044849.gif" width="174" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Shock absorbers: The cross-sectional view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-11&lt;/b&gt; shows an  oil-filled shock absorber. (The figure also includes a proposed symbol.) When  cushioned cylinders or other decelerating devices are not satisfactory or  desirable, shock absorbers are one viable alternative. Shock absorbers are  available in sizes from 3/8 in. or less up to models that can stop a loaded  overhead crane traveling at full speed in two feet or less. Some are adjustable,  some are self- adjusting. Some use metering orifices (as the figure shows),  others use tapered metering cones. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="347"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-11. Cross-sectional view of oil-filled shock absorber  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/689961811gif_00000044850.gif" width="347" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Because they may absorb a lot of energy in a short period, most have the  ability to transfer fluid from the last stroke to a reservoir for cooling. The  same reservoir replenishes the shock absorber with cooled fluid for the next  stroke. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The model depicted in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-11&lt;/b&gt; uses a spring-returned piston with  an integral check valve that travels through a bore with several metering  orifices in it. As the piston moves through its bore, there are fewer holes for  fluid to pass through. Thus, resistance to movement increases throughout the  stroke. As the piston strokes, it smoothly decelerates the load at a controlled  rate until it stops. Fluid forced out of the bore during the deceleration stroke  is sent into an oil chamber that is partially filled with a closed-cell foam  accumulator. This accumulator makes it possible for the oil chamber to accept  the extra fluid and then force it back to the bore on the return stroke. An  oil-fill port allows replenishment of any lost fluid. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most shock absorber manufacturers offer formulas in their catalogs and/or  computer programs to size their products for specific applications. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Hose-break valves: In pneumatic systems, there usually is more air available  than is required, so if a hose ruptures or is disconnected suddenly, air will  flow profusely and the loose end of the hose can whip about dangerously. A  hose-break valve set for a flow greater than working flow will close  automatically when flow tries to increase above its capacity. Air hose-break  valves never shut off completely so when the line is reconnected, the small  bleed bypass fills the repaired section and the hose-break valve opens for use.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="173"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 18-12. Cross-sectional view of hose-break valve  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/689961812gif_00000044851.gif" width="173" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The drawing and symbol in &lt;b&gt;Figure 18-12&lt;/b&gt; represent a typical hose-break  valve. Air flows into the right-hand port at a rate up to a certain cfm setting.  The distance between the shut-off poppet and its seat determines the maximum  flow rate before the shut-off poppet closes and stops flow. Reverse flow is  never blocked, but is restricted to cause a pressure drop. When pressure at the  right-hand port drops or when pressure at the left-hand port rises, the shut-off  poppet opens to pass flow.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Air-oil cylinders, tanks, and intensifiers&lt;/h2&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Air-oil systems &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Compressed air is suitable for many low-power systems, but air’s  compressibility makes it difficult to control actuators smoothly and accurately.  Some low-power systems need the smooth control, rigidity, or synchronization  capabilities normally associated with oil hydraulics. All of these features are  available to low-power circuits by using compressed air for power and oil for  control. Purchased or specially built air-oil circuits give smooth control when  the power requirement is low.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Attached oil-control cylinders &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some manufacturers offer attached oil-filled cylinders to control speed  and/or position, &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-1&lt;/b&gt;. These units usually work in one direction  of travel in a meter-out circuit. They operate such things as drill feeds or  other actions that may try to pull the cylinder out. (They also can be used with  hydraulic cylinders at higher forces.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="352"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-1. Hydraulically controlled air cylinder – set up for  fast advance, controlled feed stroke, and fast retraction &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig171gif_00000043467.gif" width="352" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most manufacturers offer units with valves in the oil line that can stop flow  and/or bypass the speed control. The stop control allows an air cylinder to be  stopped reasonably accurately with very good repeatability. The bypass control  makes it possible to have fast and controlled speeds as the cylinder  advances.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cross-sectional view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-1&lt;/b&gt; shows an air cylinder that  advances rapidly with airflow controls until its attaching bracket comes in  contact with the fast-advance stroke-length adjustment. At this point, air  cylinder movement is retarded and controlled by the oil speed-control cylinder  as oil flows through a flow control. The air cylinder cannot move any faster  than the oil flow allows during this part of the cycle. A spring-loaded oil  balance cylinder furnishes oil to make up for the differential loss from rod to  cap ends. The air cylinder is controlled by oil flow for the remainder of the  cycle.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the air cylinder retracts and the attaching bracket contacts the rod nut,  it pushes the oil speed-control cylinder back to the start position. A  flapper-type 1-way check valve on the piston with through holes allows fluid to  transfer back to the rod end. Excess cap end fluid is stored in the  spring-loaded oil balance cylinder during this part of the cycle.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some manufacturers offer attached units that are capable of control in both  directions of travel. There also are self-contained air powered cylinders with  built in oil cylinders and reservoirs. Air produces thrust while oil controls  speed and/or mid-stroke stop-and-hold. Some units also have two-speed  capabilities. These units look like a standard cylinder with an oversize  rod.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Air-oil tank systems &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another common air-oil system uses low-pressure hydraulic cylinders coupled  with air-oil tanks, &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-2&lt;/b&gt;. These tanks hold more than enough oil to  stroke the cylinder one way. An air valve piped to the air-oil tanks introduces  compressed air to force oil from the tanks into the cylinder. Add flow controls  and shut-off valves to the oil lines to give smooth, accurate cylinder  control.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="348"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-2. Typical air-oil tank arrangement &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig172gif_00000043468.gif" width="348" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When control is only necessary in one direction, the tank on the uncontrolled  side can be omitted. This type of circuit requires very good cylinder seals to  prevent air or oil transfer.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Air-over-oil tanks do not intensify the oil pressure, regardless of the  tank’s diameter or length. The highest possible oil pressure available simply  equals the air pressure supplied.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Several cylinder suppliers offer air-oil tanks that consist of a cylinder  tube with two cylinder end caps held on the tube with tie-rods. A sight glass  can be a length of plastic tubing with air-line fittings attached opposite the  air ports. A baffle at the air port keeps oil from being aerated when air blasts  in from the valve. A baffle at the oil port keeps any vortex formed from sending  air to the cylinder. This baffle also keeps returning fluid from blowing into  the air port.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Air-oil tandem cylinders &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Tandem cylinders are another approach to using oil for control and air for  power. In &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-3&lt;/b&gt;, the single-rod cylinder of the tandem runs on air,  while the double-rod cylinder is filled with oil. Because volume is equal in  both ends of the double-rod cylinder, oil flows from end to end through a flow  control and/or shut-off or skip valves for accurate control of speed and  stopping.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="348"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-3. Typical air-oil tandem-cylinder circuit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig173gif_00000043469.gif" width="348" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Two flow controls in opposite directions provide variable speed in both  directions. A bypass flow control around the stop valve would allow for  two-speed operation in one direction. (The second speed must be the slower of  the two.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The skip valve option allows a fast approach with deceleration before work  contact. The deceleration signal would come from a limit switch or limit  valve.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The schematic drawing in &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-4&lt;/b&gt; shows tandem cylinders in a  synchronizing circuit. This is a practical way to make two or more air-powered  cylinders move in unison. (Using flow controls to do this produces inaccurate  results.) When the air valve shifts to extend the cylinders they must move at  the same time. This is because the trapped hydraulic oil in the hydraulic  cylinders must transfer from the top side of one cylinder to the bottom side of  the other one. If one cylinder stops they both must stop at the same time.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="345"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-4. Circuit to synchronize air-oil tandem cylinders  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig174gif_00000043470.gif" width="345" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Note that the maximum load capability is equal to the capacity of both  cylinders’ thrust. With the load placed as shown, the left cylinder transfers  energy to the right cylinder through the oil. This gives the right cylinder up  to twice as much thrust.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A small make-up tank and check valves replenish any leakage in the plumbing  or at the rod seal. If the unit is subject to heating, a small relief valve may  be required to keep thermal expansion from over-pressuring the oil-filled  chambers. A shut-off valve connecting the transfer lines can re-synchronize the  cylinders if the piston seals allow fluid to bypass and the platen gets out of  level. Re-synchronization can be handled automatically with a normally closed,  2-way spool valve and limit switches.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;(For other air-oil circuits, see the author’s upcoming e-book, "Fluid Power  Circuits Explained.")&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Some precautions with air-oil circuits&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most air-oil circuits operate at 100 psi or less, so any pressure drop in the  circuit can cut force drastically. If oil lines are undersized, cylinder  movement will be very slow. Size most air-oil circuit oil lines for a velocity  of about 2 to 4 fps. This low speed requires large lines and valves, but is  necessary if average travel speed with maximum force is important.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another common problem with air-oil circuits is that any air trapped in the  oil makes the cylinder performance spongy. The air’s compressibility makes  accurate mid-stroke stopping and smooth speed control hard to attain. Some  arrangement should be provided to bleed any trapped air from the oil chambers.  When using an air-oil tank system, it is best to mount the tanks higher than the  cylinder they feed. All lines between the cylinder and the tanks should slope up  to the tanks. Also, if possible, let the cylinders make full strokes to purge  any air. With dual oil-tank systems, incorporate a means for equalizing tank  levels into the design.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cylinder seals must be as leak free and low friction as possible. Any  leakage past the seals can cause tank overflow, oil misting, and loss of  control.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Intensifiers (or boosters)&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;In some of the foregoing air-oil circuits, the usual 80- to 100-psi pressure  may not be adequate for some operations. This does not mean a hydraulic pump and  all the items related to it must be used. Several manufacturers make air-oil  intensifiers that convert 80- to 100-psi shop air into 500- to 40,000-psi  hydraulic pressure -- in small volumes of fluid.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Single-stroke intensifiers&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The simplest intensifier is a single rod-end cylinder with a large piston  rod. As explained in Chapter 15, a cylinder with a 2:1 area ratio rod can have  pressure as high as twice system pressure in the rod end. This type intensifier  is only available in ratios up to 2:1 unless special oversize rods are  specified.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another simple intensifier can be made by coupling the rod of a large-bore  cylinder to that of a smaller-bore cylinder with the same stroke, &lt;b&gt;Figure  17-5&lt;/b&gt;. Supplying the large bore cylinder with pressurized air or hydraulic  fluid forces the hydraulic fluid out of the smaller bore. The upper  cross-sectional view is typical of two cylinders assembled in the user’s plant  from stock air and/or hydraulic cylinders. The lower cross-sectional view is a  purchased assembly that takes less space and eliminates possible mounting and  alignment problems. The purchased unit is limited to piston ratios that can have  the same size rod in both cylinders.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="351"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-5. Two types of differential-cylinder intensifiers  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig175gif_00000043471.gif" width="351" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Usually these intensifiers are hydraulic to hydraulic with ratios that are  less than 5:1 ratio. Later we’ll see a similar design for air-to-air  intensifiers with similar ratios. Never operate these types of intensifiers  above the cylinders’ rated pressure. For all intensifier designs, output  pressure is directly related to the area ratio between the driving piston and  the driven piston (or ram).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cross-sectional view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-6&lt;/b&gt; shows typical construction of  two types of 25:1 air-oil intensifiers. They consist of 5-in. bore air cylinders  with 1-in. rods displacing oil from high-pressure oil chambers. The upper  cross-sectional view is a dual-head intensifier that requires some sort of  blocking valve to isolate its inlet oil from its outlet oil. This is usually  done with a pilot-operated check valve so flow can return when the actuator  reverses.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="288"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-6. Ram-type single-stroke intensifiers &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig176gif_00000043472.gif" width="288" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The lower cross-sectional view is a triple-head intensifier that has an  integral high-pressure seal to isolate inlet oil from high-pressure oil after  the rod moves approximately 2 in. There is no need for external isolation  because oil can flow freely either way anytime the ram is retracted.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A single-stroke intensifier must be sized to supply enough oil to make the  working cylinder perform its work before the air piston bottoms out. It is good  practice to size the intensifier for 10 to 15% more fluid than required. Avoid  long fluid conductors if possible because the oil’s compressibility and  stretching hose can use up the small-volume safety output quickly.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-7&lt;/b&gt; shows a typical high-pressure air-oil  circuit using the components described so far. This could be a press operation  that requires a 10-in. total stroke. The stroke concludes with a 0.25-in.  high-pressure stroke that generates 25 tons of force. Based on a maximum  pressure of 2000 psi, a cylinder with a 6-in. bore is needed to produce the  required force. The piston area of a 6-in.-bore cylinder is 28.274 in.2, so the  0.25-in. work stroke produces a volume of 7.07 in.3 of high-pressure oil. Using  a standard 5-in. intensifier with a 1-in. ram, this requires&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="432"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-7. Typical high-pressure air-oil circuit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig177gif_00000043473.gif" width="432" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;(7.07) (110%) / (0.7854) = 9.9-in. stroke plus 2 in. more for passing the  high-pressure seal for a total stroke of 12 in. The volume of the 6-in. bore X  10-in. stroke high-pressure hydraulic cylinder is (28.275 in.2) X (10 in.) or  283 in.3, so the air-oil tanks should have 6-in. bores and be 12-in. long.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cycle starts when the solenoid on the 4-way directional control valve is  energized to send air to the left-hand air-oil tank. Simultaneously, the valve  exhausts air from the right-hand air-oil tank. Oil at air pressure is pushed  through the triple-head intensifier to the high-pressure hydraulic cylinder. The  cylinder advances rapidly at low force until it contacts the work.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;At work contact, pressure builds in the left-hand air-oil tank and in the  pilot line to the 4-way sequence valve. With supply-air pressure at 80 psi and  the sequence valve set for 65 to 75 psi, the valve shifts and cycles the  intensifier. As the intensifier extends, after it travels approximately 2 in.,  it passes through the high-pressure seal to block low-pressure oil and force  high-pressure oil into the cylinder. Pressure in the work cylinder can now go as  high as 2000 psi to produce the required 25 tons of force.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When the solenoid on the 4-way directional control valve de-energizes, air  exhausts from the left-hand air-oil tank and from the 4-way sequence-valve  pilot. The sequence valve shifts to its original position and the triple-head  intensifier retracts. Air also is directed to the right-hand air-oil tank to  pressurize it for the retract stroke of the high-pressure hydraulic cylinder.  After the intensifier retracts past the high-pressure seal, the work cylinder  can retract quickly to end the cycle. Note: only 80 psi acting on the area of  the work cylinder develops retraction force. While as much as 25 tons of force  was generated during the short extension stroke, only 1869 lb are generated  during retraction.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The intensifier could be cycled by other means -- such as a limit switch or a  pressure switch and solenoid valve combination. It could even be operated  manually.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Also note: any of the above units could be cycled with hydraulic oil as the  driving force. Usually such hydraulic-to-hydraulic intensifiers are only between  2:1 and 5:1 because the input pressure can be much higher than typical  compressed air.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Reciprocating intensifiers&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;For higher volumes of intensified fluid, several manufacturers make  reciprocating units. The cross-sectional view and circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-8&lt;/b&gt;  show a typical single-ram intensifier that uses compressed air for power and  pumps oil in the high-pressure side. These units often are supplied in a  ready-to-run condition as pictured. They may cycle as soon as air is supplied or  they may require an external signal to start. Most reciprocating units supply  less that 3-gpm maximum at low pressure and slow to a stop at maximum  pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="346"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-8. Reciprocating air-to-hydraulic intensifier  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig178gif_00000043474.gif" width="346" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To produce higher pressures, some units incorporate more than one air  cylinder in series to raise the intensification ratio. These units also come  with pressure chambers and rams on both ends to provide a greater volume of  high-pressure oil.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some manufacturers build reciprocating hydraulic-to-hydraulic intensifiers  with ratios as high as 20:1 to generate pressures up to 12,000 psi. These units  supply small volumes of high-pressure oil from low- to high-pressure input  fluids.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Special air-oil units&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Several companies manufacture special self-contained air/hydraulic cylinders  with integral tanks and intensifiers that produce low-pressure advance,  high-pressure work, and low-pressure retract strokes. Externally, they appear to  be over-length air cylinders, but they can have output forces as high as 150  tons.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Air-to-air intensifiers&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;When an application requires a small volume of high-pressure air, try an  air-to-air intensifier instead of a high-pressure compressor. The  cross-sectional view and circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 17-9&lt;/b&gt; shows the makeup of a 2:1  intensifier that can almost double output pressure. Inlet air is delivered to  the driving cylinder by a double pilot-operated valve and to the intensifying  cylinder through check valves. As the two pistons stroke to the right, the full  area of the left piston and the annulus area of the right piston are pushing the  right piston’s full area at almost double force. Thus, air exiting the right  piston is at about twice input pressure. The discharged air flows through a  check valve and on to the high-pressure circuit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="347"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 17-9. Air-to-air intensifier with 2:1 ratio &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67385fig179gif_00000043475.gif" width="347" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When the pistons complete their strokes, the one on the right contacts a  small integral limit valve that sends a signal to the double pilot-operated  valve and shifts it to reverse the pistons’ strokes. The same areas and forces  push in this direction but they work against a smaller intensifying area. The  intensifier will continue cycling until pressure at the pressure-air outlet port  reaches full pressure. At that point, the pistons stall and hold pressure until  the downstream pressure drops.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;These intensifiers will stroke considerably more slowly at about 80% of their  maximum pressure so it is best if the output air pressure is at least 20% above  what is required. A regulator at the working machine can control the actual  working pressure so less air is wasted.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Intensification ratios and output volumes are functions of piston ratios,  bore sizes, and stroke lengths. Outputs up to 250 psi are standard with most  manufacturers. Some offer higher pressures. Very high-pressure units use  hydraulic cylinders to drive gas cylinders to reach pressures as high as 45,000  psi.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;(For more air-oil and intensifier circuit designs, see the author’s upcoming  e-book, "Fluid Power Circuits Explained.")&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-4674933214706699703?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/4674933214706699703/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/fluid-power-accessories-miscellaneous.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/4674933214706699703'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/4674933214706699703'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/fluid-power-accessories-miscellaneous.html' title=''/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-1549235252725165378</id><published>2009-07-08T10:19:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T10:20:41.310-07:00</updated><title type='text'>قوانين وجداول</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Ch 22: Fluid Power Formula&lt;/h2&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;a href="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052653.pdf" target="_blank"&gt;Click here to download the PDF Version of this  chapter&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052804.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052805.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052806.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052807.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052808.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052809.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052810.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052811.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052812.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052813.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052814.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052815.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052816.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052817.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052818.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052819.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/80281Ch22IFPBFo_00000052820.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-1549235252725165378?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/1549235252725165378/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_417.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/1549235252725165378'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/1549235252725165378'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_417.html' title='قوانين وجداول'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-8909152459418327768</id><published>2009-07-08T10:16:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T10:17:34.332-07:00</updated><title type='text'>رسومات هيدروليكيه</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Ch 21: Sample Circuits&lt;/h2&gt; &lt;p&gt;For each of the circuit diagrams, identify the numbered components and  describe the circuit's operation.&lt;br /&gt;A link to the answers follows at the bottom  of the page.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig212gif_00000051882.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig214gif_00000051883.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig216gif_00000051884.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig218gif_00000051885.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2110gif_00000051886.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2112gif_00000051887.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2114gif_00000051888.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2116gif_00000051889.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2118gif_00000051890.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2120gif_00000051891.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2122gif_00000051892.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table border="0" cellpadding="5" width="480"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/79292fig2124gif_00000051893.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-8909152459418327768?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/8909152459418327768/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_9306.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/8909152459418327768'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/8909152459418327768'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_9306.html' title='رسومات هيدروليكيه'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-5605706033429376445</id><published>2009-07-08T10:13:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T10:16:00.747-07:00</updated><title type='text'>المكدسات الهيدروليكيه4</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Hydro-pneumatic accumulators&lt;/h2&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Hydraulic accumulators&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Accumulators make it possible to store useable volumes of almost  non-compressible hydraulic fluid under pressure. The symbols and simplified  cutaway views in Figure 16-1 show several types of accumulators used in  industrial applications. They are not complete representations but they  illustrate general working principles.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="480"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-1. Cross-sectional views and symbols for hydraulic  accumulators &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig161gif_00000042784.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A 5-gal container completely full of hydraulic oil at 2000 psi will only  discharge a few cubic inches of fluid before the pressure drops to 0 psi. If the  same container were filled half with oil and half with nitrogen gas, it could  discharge more than 1 1/2 gallons of fluid while pressure only dropped 1000 psi.  This is the great advantage of hydro-pneumatic accumulators.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Accumulator types&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;u&gt;No separator&lt;/u&gt;: Some original accumulators were high-pressure containers  with a sight glass to show fluid level. They were filled approximately half with  oil and half with nitrogen gas -- with no separation barrier between them.  Before stopping the pump, a shut off valve at the accumulator discharge port was  closed to prevent fluid and gas from escaping. This type of accumulator is not  used on new circuits today, but there still are many in service.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;u&gt;Gas-charged bladder&lt;/u&gt;: Many accumulators now use a rubber bladder to  separate the gas and liquid. A poppet valve in the discharge port keeps the  bladder from extruding when the pump is off. The original design was the  bottom-repair style, shown on the left in Figure 16-1. It is still offered by  most manufacturers. The top-repair style on the right is now available and makes  bladder replacement simple and fast.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;u&gt;Gas-charged piston&lt;/u&gt;: The gas-charged piston accumulator has a  free-floating piston with seals to separate the liquid and gas. It operates and  performs similarly to the bladder type, but has some advantages in certain  applications. A gas-charged piston accumulator can cost twice as much as an  equal-sized bladder type.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;u&gt;Spring-loaded piston&lt;/u&gt;: A spring-loaded piston accumulator is identical  to a gas-charged unit, except that a spring forces the piston against the  liquid. Its main advantage is that there is no gas to leak. A main disadvantage  is that this design is not good for high pressure and large volume.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;u&gt;Weight loaded&lt;/u&gt;: All gas-charged accumulators lose pressure as fluid  discharges. This is because the nitrogen gas was compressed by incoming fluid  from the pump and the gas must expand to push fluid out. The weight-loaded  accumulator in Figure 16-1 does not lose pressure until the ram bottoms out.  Thus 100% of the fluid is useful at full system pressure. The major drawback to  weight-loaded accumulators is their physical size. They take up a lot of space  and are very heavy if much volume is required. They work well in central  hydraulic systems because there usually is room for them in the power unit area.  However, central hydraulic systems are falling out of favor, so only a few  facilities use weight-loaded accumulators. (Rolling mills are one application  where space to place large items is not a problem.) Note that there is often a  long dwell time to fill these monsters.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;u&gt;Diaphragm accumulators&lt;/u&gt;: There are also diaphragm accumulators with  resilient or metal diaphragms. They are used where the stored volume is  small.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Why are accumulators used?&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;To supplement pump flow: The most common use for accumulators is to  supplement pump flow. Some circuits require high-volume flow for a short time  and then use little or no fluid for an extended period. Generally speaking, when  half or more of the machine cycle is not using pump flow, the application is a  likely candidate for an accumulator circuit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figure 16-2 uses several accumulators to supplement pump flow  because the dwell time is 45 seconds out of the 57.5-second cycle time. This  circuit’s 22-gpm fixed-volume pump operates on pressure during most of the cycle  to fill the cylinder and the accumulators. Without the accumulators, this  circuit would require a 100-gpm pump driven by a 125-hp motor. The first cost of  the smaller pump and motor plus the accumulators is very close to that of the  larger pump and motor. However, energy savings over the life of the machine make  the pictured circuit much more economical.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="345"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-2. Accumulator circuit that supplements pump flow  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig162gif_00000042785.gif" width="345" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;One drawback of using accumulators to supplement pump flow is that the  circuit must operate at a pressure higher than needed to perform the work. In  the circuit in Figure 16-2, a minimum of 2000 psi is necessary to perform the  work. This means the accumulators must be filled to a higher pressure so they  can supply extra fluid without dropping below the minimum pressure. This circuit  uses 3000-psi maximum pressure to store enough fluid to cycle the cylinder in  the allotted time and still have ample force to do the work. The flow control in  the circuit is necessary to keep the cylinder from cycling too rapidly. An  accumulator discharges fluid at any velocity the lines can handle at whatever  the pressure drop is when a flow path is opened.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figure 16-2 uses a fixed-volume pump and an accumulator  unloading-and-dump valve. The valve forces pump flow to the accumulators when  pressure drops approximately 15% below its maximum set pressure. At set  pressure, the unloading valve opens and all pump flow bypasses to tank at 25- to  50-psi pressure drop. While the pump is bypassing, a check valve keeps the  accumulators from unloading to tank. The dump valve (which is a high-ratio,  pilot-to-close check valve) is held closed by pump idle pressure until the pump  shuts down.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;To maintain pressure: Another common application for accumulators is to  maintain pressure in a circuit while the pump is unloaded. This is especially  useful when using fixed-volume pumps on long holding cycles. The  laminating-press circuit in Figure 16-3 clamps material and holds it at force  for one to five minutes. If the pump were flowing across the relief valve at  high pressure for this length of time, a lot of heat would be generated, wasting  energy. With a pressure-compensated pump, energy loss would be less, but the  system might still overheat in a short time.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="360"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-3. Using an accumulator to maintain pressure and/or  make up for leakage &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig163gif_00000042786.gif" width="360" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Adding an accumulator, flow control, and pressure switch to the fixed-volume  pump circuit allows the pump to unload when pressure is at or above the pressure  switch’s minimum setting. If leakage at the valve or cylinder seals allows  pressure to drop about 5%, the pressure switch shifts the directional control  valve to pressurize the cylinder cap end and build pressure back to maximum. The  only time the pump is loaded is when fluid is required. This circuit will  laminate parts continuously and does not need a heat exchanger. The flow control  should be set at a reduced rate so the accumulator does not dump too rapidly  when the directional control valve shifts to retract the platen. Flow to make up  for leakage is minor and does not need a high rate. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The accumulator dump valve in Figure 16-3 is a high-ratio pilot-to-close  check valve that is held closed by the low pressure when the pump is unloaded.  It opens to discharge any stored energy when the pump shuts down. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;To absorb shock: Fast-moving hydraulic circuits can produce pressure spikes  that cause shock when flow is stopped abruptly. Accumulators can be installed in  such shock-prone circuits to reduce damaging pressure and flow spikes to an  acceptable rate -- or eliminate them completely. (Accumulators can handle other  pressure-spike concerns with some valve additions for special instances.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 16-4 depicts an accumulator installed to eliminate the pressure spike  caused by sudden flow blockage. The nitrogen charge in this installation should  be 5 to 10% above the working pressure. This keeps the accumulator out of the  circuit except during pressure spike situations. A bladder-type accumulator  works best here because of its fast response to pressure changes. (Use caution  when applying accumulators to shock situations. It is possible to actually  increase shock instead of reducing or eliminating it.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="242"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-4. Using an accumulator to eliminate shock caused by  a sudden flow stoppage &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig164gif_00000042787.gif" width="242" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As an emergency power supply: Some hydraulically operated machines may always  need to stop in the open position to keep from damaging product or equipment.  When a power failure shuts the hydraulic pump off and the machine happens to be  some position other than open, there needs to be some way to get it open. An  engine-driven standby pump could fill the bill and in some instances might be  the best remedy. Another option is to use accumulators that are charged before  the first cycle and held that way until the machine shuts down. The stored  energy is ready to cycle the machine to the open position in case of a power  failure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figure 16-5 operates a slide gate on a waste material bin that  opens hydraulically to fill a transfer truck. The circuit is located in a remote  area that is prone to power failure, so it was designed to automatically close  the gate in case power went off.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="362"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-5. Using an accumulator as an emergency power supply  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig165gif_00000042788.gif" width="362" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The schematic diagram shows the cylinder at rest with the pump running. When  the unit starts, solenoids &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;C2&lt;/i&gt; on the normally open 2-way  directional valves are energized. They stay energized while the pump is on. The  first pump flow goes through the check valve and fills the accumulator with  enough fluid to extend the cylinder from any open position. When electrical  power is available, the gate can be opened and closed to dump waste material  into the waiting truck. If a truck is filling and a power failure occurs, the  pump stops and all solenoids de-energize. At this point the accumulator is  ported to the cylinder cap end and fluid in the cylinder rod end has a free path  to tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Notice the manual drain connected to the line between the check valve and the  accumulator. This drain must be opened before working on the circuit. A placard  on the machine warns maintenance personnel of the potential danger if the  accumulator is not drained. Emergency power supplies are the only accumulator  circuit that cannot be drained automatically in most cases.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Accumulator precautions&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;li&gt;Always arrange some method to drain the accumulator at shut down. (At the  end of this section, several ways to drain an accumulator automatically are  shown. Plus, there is always the old standby, a manual drain.) Never work on a  circuit with an accumulator until you are sure it is depressurized.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Make sure accumulator flow is restricted to a reasonable rate during  operation and shut down to avoid damage to the machine or piping. Accumulators  will discharge fluid at any rate the exit flow path will allow. Such high flow  does not last long, but the damage it causes is done quickly.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Always isolate the pump from the accumulator with a check valve so fluid  cannot back flow into the pump. Without a check valve, accumulator back flow can  drive the pump backward -- and overspeed it to destruction in some instances.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Check the accumulator’s pre-charge pressure at installation and at least  once a day for the first week of operation. If there is no noticeable loss of  pressure during this time, do the next check a week later. If all is well then,  do a routine check every three to six months thereafter. Whenever the  accumulator pre-charge drops below nominal pressure, the volume of available  fluid is reduced and finally the cycle slows.  &lt;p&gt;One way to check accumulator pre-charge is to turn off the pump, allow the  accumulator to empty all oil back to tank, and then connect the items in a  charge kit, Figure 16-6. First remove the gas-valve cap and install the charge  kit gauge, hose, and tee-handle assembly on the gas valve. Next, turn the tee  handle in to open the valve and read gauge pressure. However, every time this  operation is performed there is the chance the valve will not reseat and gas  will start to leak.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="169"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-6. Charging an accumulator or checking its pre-charge  pressure with a charge kit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig166gif_00000042789.gif" width="169" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To avoid potential gas leakage, Figure 16-7 illustrates two noninvasive  methods to check pre-charge. Both are fast, simple, and can be done almost  anytime without a lengthy interruption of production. Either of these ways gives  a fast reasonably close check without invading any plumbing. They are not 100%  accurate, but will be within ±5% of the gauge reading -- with almost anyone  doing them. The method on the left is the least accurate -- especially when  using a glycerin-filled gauge.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The &lt;i&gt;Pump Just Starting&lt;/i&gt; method on the left shows a jump in pressure  after the pump starts then a steady climb to set pressure. This first jump is  the pre-charge pressure and the steady climb is during compression of the gas in  the bladder or behind the piston. The length of time between the first pressure  jump and reaching system pressure depends on the volume of the accumulator and  the pump output.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="349"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-7. Two non-invasive procedures for checking  accumulator pre-charge pressure &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig167gif_00000042790.gif" width="349" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The &lt;i&gt;Pump Shutoff From Full Pressure&lt;/i&gt; method is easiest and most  accurate, especially if the accumulator dump valve is manually operated. Fluid  can be bled off slowly with a manual dump so the gauge reaches pre-charge  pressure slowly.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;With this method the system must be at pressure and the accumulator charged  at least above pre-charge pressure. At system shut down either an automatic or  manual drain is opened and pressure starts to fall. Because the gauge is reading  oil pressure and the only reason there is pressure is because of trapped gas  above it, pressure will fall to a point then suddenly drop to zero. Read the  pressure as the gauge suddenly drops to zero to determine gas pre-charge.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This method is the most accurate but is not precise like a gauge reading, so  use it for a cursory check as often as necessary to see if the gas charge is  holding.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Accumulator pre-charge pressure&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Normally, gas-charged accumulators are pre-charged to approximately 85% of  the system’s minimum working pressure. This assures that the bladder or piston  does not discharge all the fluid during every cycle. If all fluid is evacuated  at high rates, bladders can get caught in the poppet valves and pistons can be  deformed when metal hits metal.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In certain applications, this 85% figure may be low because minimum system  pressure is low. In such a case, use a piston-type accumulator because the  piston can move up the bore almost any distance without damage. A bladder  accumulator should not be used when pre-charge pressure is less than half the  maximum pressure. This avoids compressing the bladder so tightly that rubbing  action on itself wears holes in it.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Applying accumulators&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many applications can use any type accumulator with equally satisfactory  results. However, there are some cases where one particular style is more  responsive or offers a longer service life. As mentioned in the previous  section, the amount of pre-charge pressure is one reason for selecting a bladder  or piston accumulator. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Weight-loaded accumulators respond to pressure buildup slowly so they do not  work well as shock absorbers. Weight-loaded accumulators will reduce but not  stop pressure spikes. Piston accumulators are not as fast as bladder types at  responding to fast increases to pressure. So in these situations, the best  choice is a bladder-type accumulator. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some accumulator circuits are installed to dampen high-pressure spikes at the  outlet of piston pumps. A piston accumulator in this application cannot respond  quickly enough to do the job. Also, the short stroking distance of the piston  and seals can cause excessive wear to the bore and seals. A bladder accumulator  works best in this type circuit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Sizing accumulators&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most accumulator suppliers offer information in their literature about sizing  accumulators for any of the above circuits. Many offer computer programs that  only require the input of system requirements. The program then figures  accumulator size and outputs a part number. One company offers a formula and  software for use on the Internet. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Accumulator dump valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;In all the foregoing accumulator applications (except the one for emergency  power supply), the accumulator fluid was drained automatically at shut down.  This is very important because accumulators store energy that can be a safety  hazard and can cause damage to the machine. Here are examples of different types  of accumulator dump valves and circuits.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 16-8 shows one frequently used circuit. A normally open,  solenoid-operated, 2-way directional control valve is teed into the pump line  between the isolation check valve and the accumulator. The solenoid is wired so  that it is energized when the pump starts and de-energized when the pump stops.  An orifice in front of the 2-way valve controls flow when the accumulator is  discharging to prevent damage to the valve. This arrangement works equally well  with fixed-displacement or pressure-compensated pumps. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="258"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-8. Circuit that uses a solenoid-operated valve to  dump an accumulator &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig168gif_00000042791.gif" width="258" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A note of caution: Some solenoid valves, even though they are designed for  continuous duty, get very hot when energized for long periods. Such overheating  can cause varnish deposits to form and lock the valve’s internal parts in the  closed condition after the pump shuts down. This means the trapped energy does  not get discharged and the accumulator can cause harm to anyone working on the  circuit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The dump circuit in Figure 16-9 is only for pressure-compensated pumps. A  packaged set of valves isolates the accumulator while the pump is running and  automatically dump it at shut down. The package consists of an isolation check  valve, a pilot-to-close check valve, and a flow-control orifice. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="257"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-9. Hydraulically operated circuit that isolates and  dumps an accumulator supplied by a pressure-compensated pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig169gif_00000042792.gif" width="257" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;At pump startup, flow goes to the circuit and the accumulator. Pressure from  the pump outlet shifts the pilot-to-close check valve, blocking flow to tank.  When the accumulator is full, the pump compensates to no flow and the circuit  waits for a new cycle. When pressure drops, the pump comes back on stroke and  makes up for flow going to the circuit. At pump shut down, pilot pressure to the  pilot-to-close check valve drops and the valve shifts to open. Now, stored  energy in the accumulator is ported to tank through the orifice. This circuit is  very reliable because it depends on system or pump pressure to close and/or open  valves.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A fixed-volume pump must be ported to tank at very low pressure when its flow  is not doing work. A common circuit for unloading a fixed-volume pump and  dumping an accumulator is shown in Figure 16-10. An internally piloted unloading  relief valve with integral check valve forces all pump flow to the circuit and  the accumulator until the system reaches the set pressure. As the control ball  starts to relieve, system pressure pushes against the unloading piston and  forces it off its seat. This takes all pressure off the top of the relief valve  poppet. The pump unloads to tank at 25 to 100 psi until system pressure drops  approximately 15%. After that drop, spring force pushes the unload piston back  and pump flow goes to the circuit again.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="350"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 16-10. Hydraulically operated circuit that isolates,  unloads, and dumps an accumulator supplied by a fixed-displacement pump  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/66530fig1610gif_00000042793.gif" width="350" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The accumulator dump valve blocks fluid from going to tank while the pump is  running and opens to discharge stored energy when the pump shuts down. The  accumulator dump valve is a high ratio (up to 200:1) pilot-to-close check valve  that is held shut by the pump's unloaded or work pressure. With a 200:1 area  ratio between the poppet and the pilot piston, 25-psi pressure at the pilot port  will stop as much as 5000 psi at the poppet shut off. This keeps fluid in the  accumulator circuit until the pump is shut down. Then, all stored pressurized  fluid flows to tank quickly and safely. (One supplier offers the unloading  relief valve and the accumulator dump valve in a single body. This combination  simplifies piping while offering the same effect.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Other accumulator applications&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Accumulators are also used for systems where thermal expansion could cause  excessive pressure. Cylinders with blocked ports in a high ambient heat area can  go to high pressure if there is no place for expanding fluid to go.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another use for accumulators is as a barrier between two different fluids.  The pump that uses hydraulic fluid keeps pressure on a circuit that uses water  or another incompatible medium.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;One supplier offers low-pressure accumulators as breathing devices for sealed  reservoirs. This keeps airborne contaminants out of the hydraulic oil as the  fluid level rises and falls.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;For more circuits and other information on accumulators, see the author’s  upcoming e-book &lt;i&gt;Fluid Power Circuits Explained.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-5605706033429376445?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/5605706033429376445/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/4.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/5605706033429376445'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/5605706033429376445'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/4.html' title='المكدسات الهيدروليكيه4'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-7363689927105964939</id><published>2009-07-08T09:51:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T09:59:58.266-07:00</updated><title type='text'>الاسس الهيدروليكيه</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;p&gt;Any media (liquid or gas) that flows naturally or can be forced to flow could  be used to transmit energy in a fluid power system. The earliest fluid used was  water hence the name hydraulics was applied to systems using liquids. In modern  terminology, hydraulics implies a circuit using mineral oil. &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-1&lt;/b&gt;  shows a basic power unit for a hydraulic system. (Note that water is making  something of a comeback in the late '90s; and some fluid power systems today  even operate on seawater.) The other common fluid in fluid power circuits is  compressed air. As indicated in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-2&lt;/b&gt;, atmospheric air -- compressed  7 to 10 times -- is readily available and flows easily through pipes, tubes, or  hoses to transmit energy to do work. Other gasses, such as nitrogen or argon,  could be used but they are expensive to produce and process.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig11jpg_00000014037.jpg" border="0" height="200" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-1: Basic hydraulic power unit. &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Of the three main methods of transmitting energy mechanical, electrical, and  fluid fluid power is least understood by industry in general. In most plants  there are few persons with direct responsibility for fluid power circuit design  or maintenance. Often, general mechanics maintain fluid power circuits that  originally were designed by a fluid-power-distributor salesperson. In most  facilities, the responsibility for fluid power systems is part of the mechanical  engineers' job description. The problem is that mechanical engineers normally  receive little if any fluid power training at college, so they are ill equipped  to carry out this duty. With a modest amount of fluid power training and more  than enough work to handle, the engineer often depends on a fluid power  distributor's expertise. To get an order, the distributor salesperson is happy  to design the circuit and often assists in installation and startup. This  arrangement works reasonably well, but as other technologies advance, fluid  power is being turned down on many machine functions. There is always a tendency  to use the equipment most understood by those involved.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig12jpg_00000014038.jpg" border="0" height="166" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-2: Basic pneumatic power arrangement. &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Fluid power cylinders and motors are compact and have high energy potential.  They fit in small spaces and do not clutter the machine. These devices can be  stalled for extended time periods, are instantly reversible, have infinitely  variable speed, and often replace mechanical linkages at a much lower cost. With  good circuit design, the power source, valves, and actuators will run with  little maintenance for extended times. The main disadvantages are lack of  understanding of the equipment and poor circuit design, which can result in  overheating and leaks. Overheating occurs when the machine uses less energy than  the power unit provides. (Overheating usually is easy to design out of a  circuit.) Controlling leaks is a matter of using straight-thread O-ring fittings  to make tubing connections or hose and SAE flange fittings with larger pipe  sizes. Designing the circuit for minimal shock and cool operation also reduces  leaks.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A general rule to use in choosing between hydraulics or pneumatics for  cylinders is: if the specified force requires an air cylinder bore of 4 or 5 in.  or larger, choose hydraulics. Most pneumatic circuits are under 3 hp because the  efficiency of air compression is low. A system that requires 10 hp for  hydraulics would use approximately 30 to 50 air-compressor horsepower. Air  circuits are less expensive to build because a separate prime mover is not  required, but operating costs are much higher and can quickly offset low  component expenses. Situations where a 20-in. bore air cylinder could be  economical would be if it cycled only a few times a day or was used to hold  tension and never cycled. Both air and hydraulic circuits are capable of  operating in hazardous areas when used with air logic controls or  explosion-proof electric controls. With certain precautions, cylinders and  motors of both types can operate in high-humidity atmospheres . . . or even  under water.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When using fluid power around food or medical supplies, it is best to pipe  the air exhausts outside the clean area and to use a vegetable-based fluid for  hydraulic circuits.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some applications need the rigidity of liquids so it might seem necessary to  use hydraulics in these cases even with low power needs. For these systems, use  a combination of air for the power source and oil as the working fluid to cut  cost and still have lunge-free control with options for accurate stopping and  holding as well. Air-oil tank systems, tandem cylinder systems, cylinders with  integral controls, and intensifiers are a few of the available components.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The reason fluids can transmit energy when contained is best stated by a man  from the 17th century named Blaise Pascal. Pascal's Law is one of the basic laws  of fluid power. This law says: &lt;b&gt;Pressure in a confined body of fluid acts  equally in all directions and at right angles to the containing surfaces.&lt;/b&gt;  Another way of saying this is: If I poke a hole in a pressurized container or  line, I will get PSO. PSO stands for pressure squirting out and puncturing a  pressurized liquid line will get you wet. &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-3&lt;/b&gt; shows how this law  works in a cylinder application. Oil from a pump flows into a cylinder that is  lifting a load. The resistance of the load causes pressure to build inside the  cylinder until the load starts moving. While the load is in motion, pressure in  the entire circuit stays nearly constant. The pressurized oil is trying to get  out of the pump, pipe, and cylinder, but these mechanisms are strong enough to  contain the fluid. When pressure against the piston area becomes high enough to  overcome the load resistance, the oil forces the load to move upward.  Understanding Pascal's Law makes it easy to see how all hydraulic and pneumatic  circuits function.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig13jpg_00000014039.jpg" border="0" height="263" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-3: How Pascals Law affects a cylinder &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Notice two important things in this example. First, the pump did not make  pressure; it only produced flow. Pumps never make pressure. They only give flow.  Resistance to pump flow causes pressure. This is one of the basic principles of  fluid power that is of prime importance to troubleshooting hydraulic circuits.  Suppose a machine with the pump running shows almost 0 psi on its pressure  gauge. Does this mean the pump is bad? Without a flow meter at the pump outlet,  mechanics might change the pump, because many of them think pumps make pressure.  The problem with this circuit could simply be an open valve that allows all pump  flow to go directly to tank. Because the pump outlet flow sees no resistance, a  pressure gauge shows little or no pressure. With a flow meter installed, it  would be obvious that the pump was all right and other causes such as an open  path to tank must be found and corrected.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table align="right" border="0" width="500"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig14jpg_00000014040.jpg" border="0" height="222" width="500" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-4: Comparison of mechanical and hydraulic  leverage &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;p&gt;Another area that shows the effect of Pascal's law is a comparison of  hydraulic and mechanical leverage. &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-4&lt;/b&gt; shows how both of these  systems work. In either case, a large force is offset by a much smaller force  due to the difference in lever-arm length or piston area.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Notice that hydraulic leverage is not restricted to a certain distance,  height, or physical location like mechanical leverage is. This is a decided  advantage for many mechanisms because most designs using fluid power take less  space and are not restricted by position considerations. A cylinder, rotary  actuator, or fluid motor with almost limitless force or torque can directly push  or rotate the machine member. These actions only require flow lines to and from  the actuator and feedback devices to indicate position. The main advantage of  linkage actuation is precision positioning and the ability to control without  feedback.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;At first look, it may appear that mechanical or hydraulic leverage is capable  of saving energy. For example: 40,000 lb is held in place by 10,000 lb in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-4&lt;/b&gt;. However, notice that the ratio of the lever arms and the  piston areas is 4:1. This means by adding extra force say to the 10,000-lb side,  it lowers and the 40,000-lb side rises. When the 10,000-lb weight moves down a  distance of 10 in., the 40,000-lb weight only moves up 2.5 in.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Work is the measure of a force traversing through a distance. &lt;b&gt;(Work =  Force X Distance.)&lt;/b&gt;. Work usually is expressed in foot-pounds and, as the  formula states, it is the product of force in pounds times distance in feet.  When a cylinder lifts a 20,000-lb load a distance of 10 ft, the cylinder  performs 200,000 ft-lb of work. This action could happen in three seconds, three  minutes, or three hours without changing the amount of work.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When work is done in a certain time, it is called power. &lt;b&gt;{Power = (Force X  Distance) / Time.}&lt;/b&gt; A common measure of power is horsepower - a term taken  from early days when most persons could relate to a horse's strength. This  allowed the average person to evaluate to new means of power, such as the steam  engine. Power is the rate of doing work. One horsepower is defined as the weight  in pounds (force) a horse could lift one foot (distance) in one second (time).  For the average horse this turned out to be 550 lbs. one foot in one second.  Changing the time to 60 seconds (one minute), it is normally stated as 33,000  ft-lb per minute.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;No consideration for compressibility is necessary in most hydraulic circuits  because oil can only be compressed a very small amount. Normally, liquids are  considered to be incompressible, but almost all hydraulic systems have some air  trapped in them. The air bubbles are so small even persons with good eyesight  cannot see them, but these bubbles allow for compressibility of approximately  0.5% per 1000 psi. Applications where this small amount of compressibility does  have an adverse effect include: single-stroke air-oil intensifiers; systems that  operate at very high cycle rates; servo systems that maintain close-tolerance  positioning or pressures; and circuits that contain large volumes of fluid. In  this book, when presenting circuits where compressibility is a factor, it will  be pointed out along with ways to reduce or allow for it.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another situation that makes it appear there is more compressibility than  stated previously is if pipes, hoses, and cylinder tubes expand when  pressurized. This requires more fluid volume to build pressure and perform the  desired work. In addition, when cylinders push against a load, the machine  members resisting this force may stretch, again making it necessary for more  fluid to enter the cylinder before the cycle can finish.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;As anyone knows, gasses are very compressible. Some applications use this  feature. In most fluid power circuits, compressibility is not advantageous; in  many, it is a disadvantage. This means it is best to eliminate any trapped air  in a hydraulic circuit to allow faster cycle times and to make the system more  rigid.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;&lt;i&gt;Boyle's Law&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Boyle's Law for gasses states: &lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;It is the principle that, for relatively  low pressures, the absolute pressure of an ideal gas kept at constant  temperature varies inversely with the volume of the gas.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/b&gt; In down-home  language this means if a ten cubic foot volume of atmospheric air is squeezed  into a one cubic foot container, pressure increases ten times. (10 X 14.7 psia =  147 psia.) Notice that pressure is stated as psia.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig15jpg_00000014041.jpg" border="0" height="142" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-5: Measurement of gauge and absolute  pressure &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Normally, pressure gauges read in psi (with no additional letter). Commonly  called gauge pressure, psi disregards the earth's atmospheric pressure of 14.7  psia, because it has no effect either negative or positive on a fluid power  circuit. The a on the end of psia stands for absolute, and would be shown on a  gauge with a pointer that never goes to zero unless it is measuring vacuum.  Another type of gauge that shows both negative and positive pressures would have  a pointer with an inches-of-mercury (in. Hg) scale below zero and a psig scale  above zero. Both of these gauges could read pressure or vacuum. (They are always  found in a refrigeration repairperson's tool kit. Refrigeration units have both  vacuum and pressure in different sections of the system at the same time.)  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-5&lt;/b&gt; pictures a typical psig gauge and one type of psia gauge.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In the example above, when ten cubic feet of air was squeezed into a one  cubic-foot space, both pressures were given in psia. To see what gauge pressure  (psig) would be, subtract one atmosphere from the 147-psia reading. (147 psia  14.7 psia = 132.3 psig.) To calculate the amount of compression of air in a  system, always use absolute pressure, or psia, not psig. For example: the  cylinder in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-6&lt;/b&gt; contains eight cubic feet of air at 70 psig. To  what will pressure increase when an external force pushes the piston back until  the space behind the piston is two cubic foot? It is obvious the pressure will  rise four times. At first it might look easy to take 70 psig X 4 = 280 psig, but  this answer is wrong. For the correct answer, gauge pressure must be changed to  absolute pressure. In this case by adding one atmosphere to the 70-psig reading.  (70 psig + 14.7 psia = 84.7 psia.) Now multiply the 84.7-psia pressure by 4 to  see what the absolute pressure is when the cylinder stops at one cubic foot  volume. (84.7 X 4 = 338.8 psia.) Finally, to return to gauge pressure, subtract  one atmosphere from the absolute pressure. (338.8 psia 14.7 psia = 324.1 psig.)  Notice that the correct pressure is 44.1 psig higher than when gauge pressure is  the multiplier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig16jpg_00000014042.jpg" border="0" height="178" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-6: Pressure change as air is compressed &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Temperature was not considered in both preceding cases, but notice that the  law says kept at constant temperature. Compressing a gas always increases its  temperature because the heat in the larger volume is now packed into a smaller  space. The next law says that increasing temperature increases pressure if the  gas cannot expand. This means the pressures given are measured after the gas  temperature returns to what it was originally.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Gauges today read in psi and bar. Bar is a metric or SI unit for pressure and  is equal to approximately the barometer reading or one atmosphere. One  atmosphere is actually 14.696 psi but the SI unit for bar is 14.5 psi.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;h4&gt;Charles' Law&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Heating a gas or liquid causes it to expand. Continuing to heat a liquid will  result in it changing to the gaseous state and perhaps spontaneous combustion.  If the gas or liquid cannot expand because it is confined, pressure in the  contained area increases. This is stated in Charles' Law as: The volume of a  fixed mass of gas varies directly with absolute temperature, provided the  pressure remains constant. Because fluid power systems have some areas in which  fluid is trapped, it is possible that heating this confined fluid could result  in part damage or an explosion. If a circuit must operate in a hot atmosphere,  provide over pressure protection such as a relief valve or a heat- or  pressure-sensitive rupture device. Never heat or weld on any fluid power  components without proper preparation of the unit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Static head pressure&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;The weight of a fluid in a container exerts pressure on the containing  vessel's sides and bottom. This is called static head pressure. It is caused by  earth's gravitational pull. A good example of head pressure is a community water  system. &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-7&lt;/b&gt; shows a water tower with a topmost water level of 80  feet. A cubic inch of water weighs 0.0361 pounds. Therefore a one square-inch  column of water will exert a force of 0.0361 psi for every inch of elevation.  This works out to .433 psi per foot of elevation. For the water tower in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-7&lt;/b&gt;, the pressure at the base would be: 80 ft X 0.433 psi/ft =  34.6 psi. This pressure is always available, even when no pumps are running. Of  course, if the water level drops, static head pressure also will drop.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig17jpg_00000014043.jpg" border="0" height="190" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-7: Pressure measurement for water tower &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The specific gravity of hydraulic oil is approximately 0.9, so multiplying  water's 0.433 psi per foot by 0.9 shows oil exerts 0.39 psi per foot of  elevation. Usually this fraction is rounded to 0.4 for simplicity. If the water  tower were filled to 80 ft with oil, it would exert a pressure of 32 psi at  ground level. Other fluids would develop a higher or lower static pressure  according to their specific gravities.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This pressure is only realized at ground level at the tower. Outlets at other  levels would be higher or lower according to their distance below the fluid  surface.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Tanks seen on most water towers simply store volume. Pressure does not drop  rapidly or require frequent pump starts to maintain the fluid level. The size or  shape of the tank does not affect pressure at the base. Pressure at the base of  a straight 80-ft pipe would be the same, but useful volume before pressure drop  would change drastically. Always remember: it is not the physical size of a body  of fluid that determines pressure but how deep it is.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Head pressure can have an adverse effect on a hydraulic system because many  pumps are installed above the fluid level. This means the pump must first create  enough vacuum to raise the fluid and then create even higher vacuum to  accelerate and move it. Therefore there is a limit to how far a pump can be  located above the oil level. Most pumps specify a maximum suction pressure of 3  psi. At 4- to 5-psi suction pressure, pumps start to cavitate . . . causing  internal damage. At 6- to 7-psi vacuum, cavitation damage is severe and noise  levels increase noticeably. (The effects of cavitation are covered fully in  Chapter 8, Fluid power pumps and accessory items.) Axial- or in-line-piston  pumps are especially vulnerable to high inlet vacuum damage and should be set up  below the fluid level to produce a positive head pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many modern hydraulic systems place the pump next to the reservoir so the  fluid level is always above the pump inlet. With this type of installation the  pump always has oil at startup and has a positive head pressure at its inlet. A  better arrangement puts the tank above the pump to take advantage of even  greater head pressure. Everything possible should be done to keep pressure drop  low in the pump inlet line because the highest possible pressure drop allowable  is one atmosphere (14.7 psi at sea level).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The earth's atmosphere the air we breathe exerts a force of 14.7 psi at sea  level on an average day. This pressure covers the whole earth's surface, but at  elevations higher than sea level, it is reduced by approximately 0.5 psi per  1000 feet. This pressure of earth's atmosphere is the source of the power of  vacuum. The highest possible vacuum reading at any location is the weight of the  air above it at that time. A reading of maximum vacuum available is given during  the local weather forecast as the barometer reading. Divide the barometer  reading by two to get the approximate atmospheric pressure in psi. This force  could be directly measured if it were possible to isolate a one square-inch  column of air one atmosphere tall at a sea level location. Because this is not  possible, the method used to measure vacuum is demonstrated in &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-8&lt;/b&gt;.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig18jpg_00000014044.jpg" border="0" height="211" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-8: Vacuum measurement with mercury &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Submerge a clear tube with one closed end in a container of mercury and allow  it to fill completely. (The tube must be more than 30-in. long for this example  to work when mercury is the liquid.) After the mercury displaces all the air in  the tube, carefully raise the tube's closed end, keeping the open end submerged  so the mercury can't run out and be replaced by air. When the tube is positioned  vertically, the liquid mercury level will lower to give the atmospheric pressure  reading in inches of mercury (29.92-in. H&lt;sub&gt;g&lt;/sub&gt; at sea level). The mercury  level will fluctuate from this point as high and low-pressure weather systems  move past. If the tube had been 100-in. tall, the mercury level would still have  dropped to whatever the atmospheric pressure was at its location. The reason the  mercury does not all flow out is that atmospheric pressure holds it in.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This barometer could have been built using another liquid but the tube would  have to be longer because most other liquids have a much lower specific gravity  than mercury's 13.546. Water, with a specific gravity of 1.0, would require a  closed-end tube at least 33.8 ft long, while oil, with a specific gravity of  approximately 0.9, would have to be even longer.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Vacuum pumps can be similar in design to air compressors. There are  reciprocating-piston, diaphragm, rotary-screw, and lobed-rotor designs. (See air  compressor types in Chapter 8, Fluid power pumps and accessory items.) Imagine  hooking the inlet of an air compressor to a receiver tank and leaving the outlet  open to atmosphere. As the pump runs, it evacuates air from the receiver and  causes a negative pressure in it.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig19jpg_00000014045.jpg" border="0" height="150" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-9: Cross-sectional view of venturi vacuum  generator &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Vacuum pumps are an added expense and normally are only found in facilities  that use a constant supply of negative pressure to operate machines or make  products.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Vacuum generators that use plant compressed air as a power source are also  available. These components have no moving parts but use plant air flowing  through a venturi to produce a small supply of negative pressure. &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-9&lt;/b&gt; shows a simplified cutaway view of a venturi-type vacuum generator. The  device consists of body A with compressed-air inlet B that passes air flow  through venturi nozzle C. The air exhausts at a higher velocity to atmosphere  through orifice D. As air at increasing velocity flows past opening E near the  venturi nozzle, it creates a negative pressure and draws in atmospheric air  through port F. Port F can connect to any external device that needs a vacuum  source. A vacuum gauge at port F shows negative pressure when compressed air is  supplied to port B.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Vacuum generators are inexpensive, but can be costly to operate. For every 4  cfm of air supply required to power them, they use approximately one compressor  horsepower. For this reason, venturi-type vacuum generators usually are  installed with a control valve to turn them on only when needed.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Vacuum is limited to one atmosphere maximum at any location, and standard  vacuum pumps only reach about 85% (approximately 12 psi) of this on average. As  a result, vacuum is not powerful enough to do much work unless it acts on a  large area.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig110jpg_00000014046.jpg" border="0" height="133" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-10: Simplified representation of lifting  with vacuum &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many industrial vacuum applications have to do with handling parts.  Large-area suction cups can lift a large heavy part with ease, as illustrated in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-10&lt;/b&gt;. When the lift rises, negative pressure (vacuum) inside the  suction cups causes atmospheric pressure on the opposite side of the part to  push it up.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig111jpg_00000014047.jpg" border="0" height="112" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-11: Simplified representation of work  holding with vacuum &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Industries such as glass and wood manufacturing use vacuum to hold work  pieces during machining or other operations, as shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-11&lt;/b&gt;. The  pieces are held firmly in place as the negative pressure under them causes  atmospheric pressure to push against them. A resilient seal laid in a groove in  the fixture keeps atmospheric air from entering the cavity beneath the part.  This groove can be cut to match the contour of the part. In machining  operations, the seals can isolate interior cutouts, allowing them to be removed  while firmly holding the rest of the piece.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;table align="right" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="left" valign="top"&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/eBooks/01_01_2006/Fig112jpg_00000014048.jpg" border="0" height="166" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td class="caption" align="left"&gt;Fig. 1-12: Simplified representation of  plastic-sheet forming with vacuum &lt;hr /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Heated plastic sheet can be vacuum-formed to make some products at a much  lower cost than other types of plastic forming, as suggested in &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-12&lt;/b&gt;. Forming heated plastic sheet in a cavity or over a shape is quick and  positive. When atmospheric pressure tries to fill the negative-pressure area  under the softened sheet, the sheet is forced into the desired shape. Large  parts such as pickup-truck bed liners are formed by this  method.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Two types of fluid power circuits&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most fluid power circuits use compressed air or hydraulic fluid as their  operating media. While these systems are the same in many aspects, they can have  very different characteristics in certain ways.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;For example: remote outdoor applications may use dry nitrogen gas in place of  compressed air to eliminate freezing problems. Readily available nitrogen gas is  not hazardous to the atmosphere or humans. Because nitrogen is usually supplied  in gas cylinders at high pressure, it has a very low dew point at normal system  pressure. The gas may be different but the system's operating characteristics  are the same.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Hydraulic systems may use a variety of fluids -- ranging from water (with or  without additives) to high-temperature fire-resistant types. Again the fluid is  different but the operating characteristics change little.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Pneumatic systems&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most pneumatic circuits run at low power -- usually around 2 to 3 horsepower.  Two main advantages of air-operated circuits are their low initial cost and  design simplicity. Because air systems operate at relatively low pressure, the  components can be made of relatively inexpensive material -- often by mass  production processes such as plastic injection molding, or zinc or aluminum  die-casting. Either process cuts secondary machining operations and cost.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;First cost of an air circuit may be less than a hydraulic circuit but  operating cost can be five to ten times higher. Compressing atmospheric air to a  nominal working pressure requires a lot of horsepower. Air motors are one of the  most costly components to operate. It takes approximately one horsepower to  compress 4 cfm of atmospheric air to 100 psi. A 1-hp air motor can take up to 60  cfm to operate, so the 1-hp air motor requires (60/4) or 15 compressor  horsepower when it runs. Fortunately, an air motor does not have to run  continuously but can be cycled as often as needed.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Air-driven machines are usually quieter than their hydraulic counterparts.  This is mainly because the power source (the air compressor) is installed  remotely from the machine in an enclosure that helps contain its noise.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Because air is compressible, an air-driven actuator cannot hold a load  rigidly in place like a hydraulic actuator does. An air-driven device can use a  combination of air for power and oil as the driving medium to overcome this  problem, but the combination adds cost to the circuit. (&lt;b&gt;Chapter 15&lt;/b&gt; has  information on air-oil circuits.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Air-operated systems are always cleaner than hydraulic systems because  atmospheric air is the force transmitter. Leaks in an air circuit do not cause  housekeeping problems, but they are very expensive. It takes approximately 5  compressor horsepower to supply air to a standard hand-held blow-off nozzle and  maintain 100 psi. Several data books have charts showing cfm loss through  different size orifices at varying pressures. Such charts give an idea of the  energy losses due to leaks or bypassing.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Hydraulic systems&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;A hydraulic system circulates the same fluid repeatedly from a fixed  reservoir that is part of the prime mover. The fluid is an almost  non-compressible liquid, so the actuators it drives can be controlled to very  accurate positions, speeds, or forces. Most hydraulic systems use mineral oil  for the operating media but other fluids such as water, ethylene glycol, or  synthetic types are not uncommon. Hydraulic systems usually have a dedicated  power unit for each machine. Rubber-molding plants depart from this scheme. They  usually have a central power unit with pipes running to and from the presses out  in the plant. Because these presses require no flow during their long closing  times, a single large pump can operate several of them. These hydraulic systems  operate more like a compressed-air installation because the power source is in  one location.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A few other manufacturers are setting up central power units when the plant  has numerous machines that use hydraulics. Some advantages of this arrangement  are: greatly reduced noise levels at the machine, the availability of backup  pumps to take over if a working pump fails, less total horsepower and flow, and  increased uptime of all machines.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another advantage hydraulic-powered machines have over pneumatic ones is that  they operate at higher pressure -- typically 1500 to 2500 psi. Higher pressures  generate high force from smaller actuators, which means less clutter at the work  area.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The main disadvantage of hydraulics is increased first cost because a power  unit is part of the machine. If the machine life is longer than two years, the  higher initial cost is often offset by lower operating cost due to the much  higher efficiency of hydraulics. Another problem area often cited for hydraulics  is housekeeping. Leaks caused by poor plumbing practices and lack of pipe  supports can be profuse. This can be exaggerated by overheated low-viscosity  fluid that results from poor circuit design. With proper plumbing procedures,  correct materials, and preventive maintenance, hydraulic leaks can be virtually  eliminated.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another disadvantage could be that hydraulic systems are usually more complex  and require maintenance personnel with higher skills. Many companies do not have  fluid power engineers or maintenance personnel to handle hydraulic problems.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" frame="box" rules="rows" width="490"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="middle"&gt;&lt;b&gt;5-1. Schematic drawing of a hydraulic circuit, and physical  drawing of the components in the circuit.&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/38502Fig51topgi_00000017657.gif" border="0" width="475" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/38502Fig51botto_00000017658.gif" border="0" width="475" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Typical pneumatic circuit&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 5-1&lt;/b&gt; includes a pictorial representation and a schematic drawing  of a typical pneumatic circuit. It also has a pictorial and schematic  representation of a typical compressor installation to drive the circuit (and  other pneumatic machines). Seldom, if ever, is the compressor part of a  pneumatic schematic. Power for a typical pneumatic circuit comes from a central  compressor facility with plumbing to carry pressurized air through the plant.  Pneumatic drops are similar to electrical outlets and are available at many  locations.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Why schematic drawings?&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Schematic drawings make it possible to show circuit functions when using  components from different manufacturers. A 4-way valve or other component from  one supplier may bear little physical resemblance to one from other suppliers.  Using actual cutaway views of valves to show how a machine operates would be  fine for one circuit using a single supplier's valves. However, another machine  with different parts would have a completely different-looking drawing. A person  trying to work on these different machines would have to know each brand's ins  and outs . . . and how they affect operations. This means designing and  troubleshooting every circuit would require special and different knowledge.  Using schematic symbols requires learning only one set of information for any  component.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Schematic symbols also give more information than a picture of the part. It  may almost impossible to tell if a 4-way valve is 3-position by looking at a  pictorial representation. On the other hand, its symbol makes all features  immediately clear. Another advantage is that by using ISO symbols the drawing  can be read by persons from different countries. Any notes or the material list  may be unreadable because of language differences, but anyone trained in  symbology can follow and understand circuit function.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Parts of a typical pneumatic system&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;The schematic in &lt;b&gt;Figure 5-1&lt;/b&gt; starts at the filter, regulator, and  lubricator (FRL) combination that is connected to the plant-air supply. FRL  units are important because they assure a clean, lubricated supply of air at a  constant pressure. It's important to keep these units supplied, drained, and set  correctly to keep the circuit operating smoothly and efficiently.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The filter is first in line to remove contamination and condensed water. It  should be drained regularly or fitted with an automatic drain. The regulator  should be set at the lowest pressure that will produce good parts at the cycle  rate specified. The lubricator should be adjusted to allow oil to enter the air  stream at a reasonable rate. In poorly maintained plants, the filter may be  completely full of contaminants, the regulator is screwed all the way in, and  the lubricator is completely empty.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Air-logic controls&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Air-operated miniature valves called air-logic controls control the circuit  in &lt;b&gt;Figure 5-1&lt;/b&gt;. Air-logic controls run on shop air and are actuated by air  palm buttons and limit valves to start and continue a cycle.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This circuit has an OSHA safe anti tie-down dual palm button start control.  The two palm buttons must be operated at almost the same time or the cylinder  will not extend. Tying down one palm button renders the circuit inoperative  until it is released. The rest of the logic circuit causes the drills to extend  and keeps the clamp cylinder down until they have all retracted and stopped.  This circuit also has an anti-repeat feature, which means the cycle only  operates once, even if the operator continues to hold the palm buttons down.  Safety features such as these are easy to implement.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Directional-control valves&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;A 5-way, double-pilot-operated directional control valve operates the  cylinder. This valve extends and retracts the cylinder according to signals from  the air logic controls in the cabinet. Movement also requires inputs from the  palm buttons to make sure the operator is safely clear of the cylinder before it  operates. This directional control valve has speed-control mufflers in its  exhaust port to control cylinder speed in both directions. These devices also  reduce noise from exhausting air.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A limit valve at the extend stroke of the cylinder makes sure it has reached  the part before the drills start. A limit valve monitors position but it cannot  tell if the cylinder has reached full clamping force. In most applications when  the cylinder is close enough to make the limit valve, it will be at or near  clamping force before the next operation gets to the work. In some applications  it might be necessary to add a pressure sequence valve to make sure the cylinder  reaches a certain pressure before the cycle continues.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Air drills&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Rotary output devices such as air motors with built-in cycling valves and  rotary actuators that make only a fraction of a turn are available to perform  many functions. Because compressed air is the driving force, these devices are  explosion-proof and can operate in dirty or wet atmospheres without the problems  posed by electrical equipment. Carefully applied air-operated devices can be an  improvement in many situations.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;These and other air-operated components are explained and applied in the  following chapters.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" frame="box" rules="rows" width="490"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="middle"&gt;&lt;b&gt;5-2. Schematic drawing of an air circuit with air-logic  controls, and physical drawing of the components in the circuit.&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/38502Fig52topgi_00000017659.gif" border="0" width="475" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/38502Fig52botto_00000017660.gif" border="0" width="475" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Typical hydraulic circuit&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 5-2&lt;/b&gt; provides a pictorial representation and a schematic drawing  of a typical hydraulic circuit. Notice that the hydraulic power unit is  dedicated to this machine. Unlike pneumatic circuits, most hydraulic systems  have a power unit that only operates one machine. (As mentioned before, some new  installations are using a central hydraulic power source with piping throughout  the plant to carry pressurized and return fluid.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Why a schematic drawing?&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Schematic drawings make it possible to show circuit functions when using  components from different manufacturers. A 4-way valve or other part from a  different supplier may bear little resemblance to one from other suppliers.  Using actual cutaways of a valve to show how a machine operates would be fine  for one circuit using one supplier's valves. Nevertheless, another machine with  different parts would have a completely different looking drawing. A person  trying to work on these different machines would have to know each brand and how  they affect operations. This means designing and trouble shooting every circuit  would require special different knowledge. Using schematic symbols requires  learning only one set of information for any component.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Schematic symbols also give more information than a picture of the part. It  may be hard to impossible to tell if a 4-way valve is 3-position by looking at a  pictorial representation while its symbol makes all features immediately clear.  Another feature is by using ISO symbols the drawing can be read by persons from  different languages. Any notes or the material list may be in a language foreign  to you but following and understanding circuit function should not be a  problem.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Parts of a typical hydraulic schematic&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;A good starting point for any hydraulic schematic is at the power unit. The  power unit consists of the reservoir, pump or pumps, electric motor, coupling  and coupling guard, and entry and exit piping, with flow meters and return  filter. It also might include relief valves, unloading valves, pressure filters,  off-line filtration circuits, and control valves. The power unit must be able to  cycle all functions in the allotted time at a pressure high enough to do the  work intended. A well-designed circuit will run efficiently with little to no  wasted energy that generates heat. It will run many years with minimum  maintenance if its filters are well maintained and it is not overheated.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When items such as pressure gauges and flow meters are installed, it is easy  to troubleshoot any system malfunction quickly and accurately. Flow meters  always show pump flow (or lack thereof) and eliminate premature pump  replacement. They can indicate impending pump failure well in advance of system  failure. Also quick-disconnect plug-in type ports at strategic locations make it  easy to check pressure at any point.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Directional control valves&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 5-2&lt;/b&gt; has only one directional control valve to  extend and retract the main cylinder. Pressure-control valves make the hydraulic  motor and rotary actuator operate in sequence after the cylinder extends and  builds a preset pressure. (This is not the best way to control actuators, but it  is shown here to demonstrate the use of different valves.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;An isolation check valve between the pumps keeps the high-pressure pump from  going to tank when the low-volume pump unloads. A pilot-operated check valve in  the line to the cap end of the main cylinder traps fluid in the cylinder while  the motor and rotary actuator operate.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Pressure-control valves&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;A pressure-relief valve at the pumps automatically protects the system from  overpressure. An unloading valve dumps the high-volume pump to tank after  reaching a preset pressure. A kick-down sequence pressure-control valve forces  all oil to the cylinder until it reaches a preset pressure. After reaching this  pressure, the valve opens and sends all pump flow to the hydraulic motor first.  A sequence valve upstream from the rotary actuator keeps it from moving until  the hydraulic motor stalls against its load. A pressure-reducing valve ahead of  the hydraulic motor allows the operator to set maximum torque by adjusting  pressure to the motor inlet. (All of these controls are covered in the text of  this manual.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another pressure-control valve -- called a counterbalance valve -- located in  the rod end line of the main cylinder keeps it from running away when the  directional control valve shifts. The counterbalance valve is adjusted to a  pressure that keeps the cylinder from extending, even when weight on its rod  could cause this to happen.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Accumulators&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Because hydraulic oil is almost non-compressible, a gas-charged accumulator  allows for storage of a volume of fluid to perform work. The expandable gas in  the accumulator pushes the oil out when external pressure tries to drop. The  accumulator in this circuit makes up for leakage in the cylinder cap-end circuit  while pump flow runs the hydraulic motor and rotary actuator. Use care when  specifying and using accumulators because they can be a safety issue.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;These and other hydraulic components are explained and applied in the  following chapters.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Parallel and series circuits&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;There are parallel and series type circuits in fluid power systems. Pneumatic  and hydraulic circuits may be parallel type, while only hydraulic circuits are  series type. However, in industrial applications, more than 95% of hydraulic  circuits are the parallel type. All pneumatic circuits are parallel design  because air is compressible it is not practical to use it in series  circuits.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In parallel circuits, fluid can be directed to all actuators simultaneously.  Hydraulic parallel circuits usually consist of one pump feeding multiple  directional valves that operate actuators one at a time or several in  unison.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 5-3&lt;/b&gt; shows a typical pneumatic parallel system schematic. All  actuators in this circuit can operate at the same time and are capable of full  force and speed if they have ample supply. The filter, regulator, and lubricator  combination must be sized to handle maximum flow of all actuators in motion at  the same time, When the air supply is insufficient, the cylinder with the least  resistance will move first.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" frame="box" rules="cols" width="490"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="middle"&gt;&lt;b&gt;5-3. Schematic drawing of three cylinders in a typical  pneumatic parallel circuit.&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/38502Fig53gif_00000017654.gif" border="0" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 5-4&lt;/b&gt; shows a typical hydraulic parallel system schematic. Any  actuator in this circuit can move at any time and is capable of full force and  speed when the pump produces sufficient flow. Parallel circuits that have  actuators that move at the same time must include flow controls to keep all flow  from going to the path of least resistance.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" frame="box" rules="cols" width="490"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="middle"&gt;&lt;b&gt;5-4. Schematic drawing of three cylinders in a typical  hydraulic parallel circuit.&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/38502Fig54gif_00000017655.gif" border="0" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;p&gt;Flow controls are usually required to keep single cylinder movement from over  speeding. The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 5-4&lt;/b&gt; shows a meter-in flow control at each  directional control valve's inlet to control speed in both directions. Placing  flow controls at the cylinder ports would allow separate speeds for extension  and retraction.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 5-5&lt;/b&gt; illustrates cylinders or hydraulic motors in typical series  circuits. These synchronizing circuits are the most common use for actuators in  series. The schematic drawing at left shows how to control two or more cylinders  so they move simultaneously at the same rate. Oil is fed to the cylinder on the  left and it starts to extend. Oil trapped in its opposite end transfers to the  right cylinder, causing it to extend at the same time and rate. Oil from the  right cylinder goes to tank. The platen moves and stays level regardless of load  placement. Notice that this circuit uses double-rod end cylinders so the volumes  in both ends are the same. (Other variations of this circuit are shown in the  chapter on cylinders, which also explains synchronizing circuits in detail.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="1" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="2" frame="box" rules="rows" width="490"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td align="middle"&gt;&lt;b&gt;5-5. Schematic drawings of two synchronizing hydraulic  circuits.&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/38502Fig55gif_00000017661.gif" border="0" width="475" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt; &lt;p&gt;The hydraulic motor circuit on the right in &lt;b&gt;Figure 5-5&lt;/b&gt; shows a simple  way to run two or more motors at the same speed. Fluid to the first motor flows  into the inlet of the second motor to turn it at the same time and speed. Except  for internal leakage in the motors, they will run at exactly the same rpm. As  many as ten motors can operate in series -- based on their loads and speeds.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Hydraulics vs. pneumatics&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pressurized fluids act in a certain manner in most situations. However, there  are instances where a gas-type fluid does not perform as its liquid counterpart  does. As mentioned earlier in this chapter, a pneumatic actuator is incapable of  holding a position against increasing external forces because the air can be  compressed more. Other situations such as flow-control circuits, return-line  backpressure, energy-transfer considerations, and more are covered and explained  in the text.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Conventions used in this manual&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;All schematic symbols and drawings are in accordance with the International  Standards Organization (ISO) format. These symbols and representative parts are  laid out in Chapter 4 either in whole or in part. Some symbols are made up of  several standard parts and are not shown in their entirety in &lt;b&gt;Chapter  4&lt;/b&gt;.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When a symbol is not shown it is good practice to use the symbol shown in the  suppliers catalog. If no symbol is given there then use standard symbol parts to  make a representation of the new item.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;As in all cases of drawings using schematic symbols, the circuit designer may  use his or her experience or opinion to interpret some parts. This usually does  not make the schematic harder to read, just different. If a part representation  is not clear, refer to the material list and check the supplier's catalog for an  explanation of the valve's function.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h4&gt;Color coding&lt;/h4&gt; &lt;p&gt;To better understand how a part or circuit works, consider using color coding  for the lines and components. Color coding is instituted by the instructor,  designer, or engineer and is according to his or her interpretation, so it might  not be consistent in each case. Most training manuals and manufacturers use the  following color code.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Red&lt;/b&gt;: Working fluid flow lines, usually from the pump to a device.  This line is always solid. It can represent plastic tubing as small as 5/32-in.  OD for air or any size pipe or tubing for hydraulics.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Blue&lt;/b&gt;: Return lines from valves and other devices for hydraulic  circuits. This line always is solid, and can represent any size pipe or tubing.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Yellow&lt;/b&gt;: Metered or flow-controlled fluid that is at a reduced speed  in relation to the same line without a restriction. This line could be solid or  a series of long dashes if pilot flow must be metered.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Orange&lt;/b&gt;: A reduced-pressure line, such as a pilot-pressure line or one  carrying accumulator precharge gas. This line could be a solid after a reducing  valve or a long-dashed line for pilot flow.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Green&lt;/b&gt;: Pump inlet lines (suction lines) or drain lines. These lines  would be solid for the pump inlet and a series of short dashes for drains. Two  types of lines with the same color are not confusing -- even when in close  proximity to each other.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Purple or indigo&lt;/b&gt;: These colors usually indicate working fluid that  has been pressure-intensified by area differences or load-induced conditions.  These pressures are usually greater than the setting of the main relief valve or  reducing valve that feeds the circuit.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Lines without color are considered non-working or to have no flow at  present.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; &lt;p&gt;This color-coding technique is used in the transparencies used with this  manual&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;!--noad--&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-7363689927105964939?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/7363689927105964939/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_7697.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/7363689927105964939'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/7363689927105964939'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_7697.html' title='الاسس الهيدروليكيه'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-557791188757434708</id><published>2009-07-08T09:36:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T09:49:31.431-07:00</updated><title type='text'>المضخات الهيدروليكيه</title><content type='html'>&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Fluid power pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;A fluid power system’s prime mover is a pump or compressor that converts  electricity or some form of heat energy into hydraulic or pneumatic energy.  These devices can be rotary or reciprocating, single or multiple stage, and  fixed or variable volume. They may move a variety of fluids and come in many  different designs. Some pump designs offer unique features that make them  especially suitable for a particular application. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-1&lt;/b&gt; shows several types of compressors in simplified cutaway  form. These cutaways represent many standard designs used in industrial  applications. They are not complete representations but simply show general  working principles. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="485"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-1. Several designs of rotary air compressors  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig81jpg_00000019820.jpg" border="0" width="485" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Reciprocating-piston air compressors&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The single-piston/single-stage, dual-piston/single-stage, and  dual-piston/dual-stage compressors illustrated in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-1&lt;/b&gt; are typical  designs for piston-type air pumps. Compressors of these designs may be rated as  low as horsepower or as high as 1000 or more horsepower. The smaller sizes are  air cooled while larger ones are water cooled. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Single-stage compressors normally operate at 125 psi or less and produce  approximately 4 scfm (standard cubic feet per minute) of flow at 100 psi. (One  scfm is 1 ft&lt;sup&gt;3&lt;/sup&gt; of gas at 68°F, 14.69 psia, and a relative humidity of  36%. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Diaphragm air compressors keep lubricating fluids out of the air or gas they  are compressing. This arrangement often makes the air suitable for breathing and  it can be used in applications where contamination from compressor oil cannot be  tolerated. The cutaway view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-1&lt;/b&gt; shows an oil-driven diaphragm  compressor that is capable of very high pressure. As the oil piston extends, it  forces oil against the diaphragm to compress the gas. On the retract stroke,  pressure inside the diaphragm plus vacuum returns the bladder to pick up more  atmospheric air. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Piston-type reciprocating compressors below a 15- to 25-hp range usually  start and stop at preset low and high pressure settings. Larger reciprocating  compressors typically continue to run after pressure reaches the preset maximum,  but they then stop compressing by holding their inlet valves open. This  arrangement is called unloading. It saves wear on the electric motor because the  motor only has to start one time. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Rotary compressors &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Rotary compressors employ lobed rotors, vanes, screws, or impellers to draw  in ambient air and compress it. &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-1&lt;/b&gt; also shows these devices.  While these types of air pump are more compact and produce less vibration, they  have lower efficiency than other types. All these designs (except the  multi-stage centrifugal compressor) are limited to a maximum of 150 to 200  horsepower. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Rotary compressors run continuously and are capable of no flow to full flow  at any time. An inlet-restricting valve closes or opens in response to pressure  changes. Many rotary compressor installations do not require a receiver tank,  due to their ability to change flow in relation to demand. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pneumatic pump efficiency&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Using atmospheric air as a means to transmit energy is very inefficient. A  1-hp air motor requires between 7 and 15 compressor hp while it runs. A  hydraulic motor that produces the same output would only need 1½ to 2 hp input.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Air cylinders are more efficient than air motors, but still require three to  four times more prime mover energy than their hydraulic counterparts. The  general rule of thumb is: use hydraulic cylinders when an air-cylinder circuit  would require a 4- or 5-in. or larger bores to produce the necessary force. This  is especially important when the cylinders must operate at high cycle rates.  Up-front cost of the hydraulic system is more, but operating cost savings soon  pay for the added expense. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;On the other hand, a 20-in. bore air cylinder used to maintain tension on a  conveyor belt (with minimal cycling) would be a very efficient system. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Complete air compressor installation&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-2&lt;/b&gt; combines the schematic diagram and picture representation  of a typical air compressor installation. (The compressor could be a  reciprocating or rotary type.) The aftercooler may not be required on  installations under 50 hp, and it could be air-cooled instead of water-cooled.  An air dryer is necessary in certain applications, but is often left out due to  added cost. As noted earlier, a receiver tank might be eliminated with a rotary  compressor is there never is a demand for short bursts of high-volume air. Water  traps with drains are required on all systems because a compressor takes in a  lot of water with the ambient air. (Even with an air dryer there is always the  time when the dryer needs service but the system cannot be shut down. A trap  will help during these times.) Other components, such as isolation or bypass  valves for the aftercooler and air dryer, often are part of the circuit. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="485"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-2. Pictorial (at left) and schematic representations  of typical air compressor installation &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig82jpg_00000019821.jpg" border="0" width="485" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Hydraulic pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most hydraulic pumps are positive-displacement devices. Pumps with positive  sealing parts -- whether rotary or reciprocating -- move fluid every time they  operate. This means that if the pump is turning, it produces flow. (Conversely;  blocking flow stops the pump’s rotation mechanically.) Positive-displacement  pumps have higher efficiencies than their non-positive-displacement  counterparts, such as impeller or centrifugal designs. &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-3&lt;/b&gt;  illustrates some non-positive-displacement designs that could be used to run  hydraulic circuits. Because these pumps only run at 50 to 75% efficiency, they  are not used in high-pressure circuits. They are frequently found in systems  with high-water-content fluids (HWCF), such as 95% water and 5% soluble oil,  because these pumps require little or no lubrication. Also, these systems  usually operate at or below 400 psi. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-3. Two types of non-positive-displacement pumps  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig83jpg_00000019822.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some positive-displacement pumps are paired with centrifugal pumps to  pressurize their inlets to keep them from cavitating. Or, when a  positive-displacement pump is run at higher rpm than specified, the inlet may  not be large enough to let in enough fluid at atmospheric pressure. In this case  a non-positive-displacement pump can force fluid into the undersized inlet and  eliminate cavitation. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A non-positive-displacement pump does not require a relief valve in many  installations. There is enough slippage in most designs to allow for stopping  flow while not over pressuring the circuit. However, if the pump operates at no  flow for more than two or three minutes, simple bypass circuit to move fluid for  cooling purposes should be added. The bypass circuit could be a small relief  valve, a manual petcock, or a normally closed solenoid valve operated by a timer  or pressure switch. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The propeller design is the least efficient of these pumps because there is a  direct path from inlet to outlet through the blades. The minimum rpm of this  type pump is high due to this open path. The centrifugal-impeller design  operates at much closer tolerance so it slips less fluid while operating. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Fixed-displacement pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Fixed-displacement pumps are found most commonly in circuits with a single  actuator. This allows the pump to be unloaded at little or no pressure when not  performing work. A multiple-actuator circuit, where only one device moves at a  time, can also be practical for fixed-displacement pumps if the actuators use  about the same volume of fluid. This means total pump flow is either doing work  at load pressure or is being sent to tank at very low pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Avoid using meter-in or meter-out flow controls with fixed-volume pumps  because a flow restriction increases pressure and the increase sends fluid to  tank at the relief valve setting. This produces excess heat and all the problems  associated with it. One way to use fixed-displacement pumps with  multiple-actuator circuits is to include an accumulator with an unloading and  dump valve. With this circuit, the pump is only on pressure when fluid is  required. The accumulator accepts excess pump flow and provides working flow  when the pump is unloaded. &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-12&lt;/b&gt; shows a fixed-volume pump with an  accumulator. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Fixed-displacement pumps are usually less expensive and more contamination  tolerant than pressure-compensated pump. Note: this does not mean they should be  run with dirty fluid or that cheaper is really less expensive. It only means  they fill the bill in many applications where cost is a factor. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Gear-on-gear fixed-displacement pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;One of the oldest hydraulic pumps is the gear-on-gear design shown in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-4&lt;/b&gt;. As the driven gear turns, the idler gear turns in the  opposite direction. At first, air trapped between the teeth and housing is moved  to the outlet and forced out by the meshing teeth in the center. This starting  action creates a negative pressure (vacuum) at the inlet. Atmospheric pressure  then pushes oil into the pump. Now hydraulic fluid flows around the teeth and  out to the circuit. Because the sealing action -- between the gear teeth and the  housing, and where the teeth mesh -- has minimum clearance, when fluid is  blocked, the gears stop turning. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-4. Gear-on-gear positive-displacement pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig84jpg_00000019823.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A standard gear pump is unbalanced because there is high pressure on one side  and low pressure or vacuum on the other side of the gears. This causes high  bearing loads and shortened service life at pressures above 1500 psi. Some newer  designs reduce this unbalance by clearing the housing (or clearance area) and  only having a short sealing area. This greatly reduces bearing forces so that  pressures up to 4000 psi continuous are commonplace today. However, even with  this new design there is no compensation for gear or housing wear. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Gear-on-gear pumps can have more than one pumping section within a common  housing. This allows for different flows or pressures to some circuits for speed  and force changes. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Internal-gear fixed-displacement pumps &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-5&lt;/b&gt; shows a cutaway view and the symbol for an internal-gear  pump. The standard design is unbalanced and has no way to compensate for tooth  or housing wear. Most pumps of this type are limited to 1000 psi or less. They  are often used as transfer or supercharging pumps at low pressure due to their  less efficient design. (There is a German-designed internal-gear pump that has a  wear-compensating feature and a special bearing arrangement that allows it to  operate continuously at up to 5000 psi and with more than 95% overall efficiency  throughout its life.) Standard gear pumps start out at 85 to 90% efficiency when  new. As the gears and housing wear, their efficiency deteriorates until they no  longer supply enough fluid to maintain cycle time. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-5. Internal-gear positive-displacement pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig85jpg_00000019824.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Gerotor fixed-displacement pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The newest design of a gear pump is called a gerotor (combining the words  generated and rotor). A cutaway view and symbol is shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-6&lt;/b&gt;.  This pump design is not common in the marketplace. At present there are only one  or two manufacturers that offer this type. On the other hand, as a fluid motor  it is one of the most common designs and is offered by more than 15 different  companies. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-6. Gerotor-type positive-displacement pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig86jpg_00000019825.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A gerotor pump uses a driven gear of, say, seven teeth inside an  internal-tooth gear with eight teeth. The driven gear rotates inside the  internal tooth gear and they both turn in the same direction. Because of the  machined shapes, the driven gear always makes contact with the internal tooth  gear at different points as they rotate. As the example in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-6&lt;/b&gt;  shows, this allows cavities to open and close as the gears turn. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In the example, as the driven gear turns clockwise, the internal tooth gear  turns the same direction, but at one tooth per revolution slower speed. This  action causes cavities to form on the left hand that start reducing pressure in  this area. This reduced pressure (vacuum) allows higher atmospheric pressure to  push fluid into the pump and fill the forming cavities. Kidney-shaped cavities  in this sector, on both sides of the teeth, accept fluid to fill them for 180°  around the inlet side. As the gears continue to turn, the cavities formed on the  left side start closing on the right hand side. This forces fluid through the  kidney-shaped openings and to the outlet port. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Like other gear pumps, gerotor pumps are unbalanced and have no way to  compensate when clearances become worn. Although a new gerotor pump starts out  at 85 to 90% efficiency, it deteriorates as it runs and constantly loses volume.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Gerotor pumps also can have more than one pumping section in a common  housing, again allowing for different flows or pressures to some circuits for  speed and force changes. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another point on gear pumps: their output flow cannot be varied -- except by  changing them physically or running them at a different speed. The next two  types of pumps are capable of changing volume while running the same speed.  These pumps can also reduce flow on a pressure build-up signal and almost  eliminate the need for a relief valve. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Multi-screw fixed-displacement pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-7&lt;/b&gt; is similar to a gear pump but uses helical  gears or screws to move the fluid. The driven screw is in close fit mesh with  the idler screws and all gears have minimum clearance in the housing. As the  driven screw turns, the idler screws also turn and the cavities between the  screws move toward the outlet. This action forms a vacuum at the inlet.  Atmospheric pressure then pushes fluid into the cavities and the fluid moves to  the outlet. This pump has very smooth flow -- without the pulses produced by the  other positive-displacement pumps in this manual. Flow from the outlet is smooth  and continuous. However, screw pumps are not highly efficient. There is a lot of  bypass in the original design and as the screws and housing wear, bypass  increases. This design pump often is used to supercharge other pumps, as a  filter pump, or a transfer pump at low pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-7. Multiple-screw pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig87jpg_00000019826.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Vane-type fixed-displacement pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The most common pump for industrial applications is the vane design shown in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-8&lt;/b&gt;. The left-hand cutaway view illustrates the original  unbalanced design. Today, most vane pumps are of the balanced design shown on  the right. Balanced vane pumps operate at higher pressures and have long bearing  life. All vane designs compensate for wear, so their efficiency stays in the 90  to 95% range throughout their service lives. Vane pumps are efficient, quiet,  and inexpensive. They have great longevity when supplied with clean fluid. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8.8 Two designs of vane pumps &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig88jpg_00000019827.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As a prime mover turns the rotor, centrifugal force slings the vanes outward.  (Most manufacturers recommend a minimum speed of 600 rpm to make the vanes  extend.) Now, as the vanes follow the off-center cam ring, a chamber is formed  between the cam ring and the rotor. This chamber gets larger as the vanes  extend, creating a negative pressure (vacuum) at the inlet port. Atmospheric  pressure then forces fluid into these enlarging voids and fluid starts to move.  As a vane passes the highest point on the cam ring, it is forced back into its  slot and the chambers between the vanes decrease. As a chamber size decreases,  fluid is forced out through the kidney-shaped openings to the outlet. Even  though vane tips wear, they still touch the cam ring, so efficiency is not  affected for a long time. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The other leakage and wear point is at the sides of the gears or rotors of  these pumps. Most modern vane pumps have pressure-loaded floating plates that  are hydraulically forced against the turning members. Hydraulic pressure tries  to push the plates away from the gears or rotors in a certain area, but a  slightly larger area on the opposite side of the plates pushes back under the  same pressure. This keeps the side areas sealed without applying excess force  against the turning members. (Some inexpensive low-pressure pumps may not have  floating side plates but depend instead on manufacturing tolerances to control  leakage.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Note that the unbalanced vane pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-8&lt;/b&gt; has pressure on one  side of the rotor and vacuum on the other side. This pump has to have large  bearings or operate at lower pressures. The balanced-design pump pictured on the  right has pressure on opposite sides of the rotor. As a result, the bearing load  is the same at 0 psi, 2000 psi, or any pressure at which the pump runs. The  balanced design also produces twice the flow for the same overall package size.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Vane pumps are available with two or three pumps in one housing to give more  flow or different rates of flow to satisfy the needs of some circuit designs.  These pumps have a common inlet and separate outlets as required. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Typical circuits for fixed-volume pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-9&lt;/b&gt; shows a circuit using a fixed-volume pump in a simple,  single-cylinder circuit. A tandem-center directional control valve routes all  pump flow to tank at low pressure when the cylinder is idle. When the cylinder  cycles, pressure never goes higher than necessary to do the work at hand, so  energy waste is minimal. With an efficient pump, this circuit operates all day  without a heat exchanger and fluid temperature never increases more than 10° or  15°F above ambient. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-9. Schematic diagram of open-center circuit with  fixed-volume pump supplying single cylinder &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig89jpg_00000019828.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-10&lt;/b&gt; shows a multiple-cylinder circuit supplied by a  fixed-volume pump. Here, the tandem-center valves are connected in series, so  all pump flow can go to tank when the actuators are idle. This circuit works  best when the actuators do not move simultaneously. When two or more actuators  move at the same time, the pressure to make the cylinders move is additive and  may exceed the relief valve setting. Also, downstream actuators only get fluid  from the actuators upstream from them. As a result, stroke lengths may be  limited. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-10. Schematic diagram of open-center circuit with  fixed-volume pump supplying multiple cylinders &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig810jpg_00000019829.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Use caution when selecting directional valves for this circuit. Pay  particular attention to pressure-drop charts because pressure drop is additive  for each valve. This circuit could start up with a 200-psi drop at idle. With  more valves in series, pressure drop at idle and running can cause sluggish  operation and generate heat. Also, choose valves that are able to operate at  tank line pressure. Every upstream valve sees pressure at pump and tank ports  while a downstream actuator is working. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-11&lt;/b&gt; shows a multiple-cylinder circuit that uses a normally  open solenoid-operated relief valve to unload the pump when the actuators are  idle. Anytime an actuator cycles, a solenoid on its directional control valve  and the solenoid on the normally open solenoid-operated relief must be energized  at the same time. This circuit often requires flow controls -- and may need a  heat exchanger to get rid of wasted energy. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-11. Schematic diagram of closed-center circuit with  relief valve and fixed-volume pump supplying multiple cylinders &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig811jpg_00000019830.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-12&lt;/b&gt; has a fixed-volume pump with an accumulator  to store energy and allow the pump to unload when no fluid is required to do  work. It is similar to a pressure-compensated pump circuit because there is only  pump flow at pressure when the circuit calls for it. The  pump-unloading-and-accumulator-dump valve sends pump flow to the circuit until  pressure reaches its set level. After reaching set pressure, the valve opens  fully and dumps all pump flow to tank at minimum pressure. When circuit pressure  drops about 10 to 15%, this valve closes and again directs pump flow to the  circuit. (A normally open solenoid-operated relief valve controlled by a  pressure switch could be used in place of the  pump-unloading-and-accumulator-dump valve.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-12. Schematic diagram of closed-center circuit with  pump-unloading and accumulator-dump valve, and fixed-volume pump supplying  multiple cylinders &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig812jpg_00000019831.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pressure-compensated, variable-volume vane pumps &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-13&lt;/b&gt; shows cutaway views and symbols for a pressure-compensated  vane pump. Vane pumps are one type of fixed-volume pump that can be made to  function as variable volume and/or pressure compensated. The pumping action is  the same as the fixed-volume, unbalanced vane pump previously discussed. The  difference is that the cam ring is not fixed but can move in relation to the  rotor. An adjustable force spring holds the cam ring in its offset position  until enough pressure builds inside it to push against the spring and drive it  toward center. As the cam ring moves closer to center, output flow decreases  until it finally stops. The cam ring never makes it all the way to center  because some flow is always needed to make up for internal bypass. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-13. Cross-sectional views of vane pump at full flow  and at no flow &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig813jpg_00000019832.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Internal leakage in fixed-volume pumps passes into the case and back into the  inlet flow. Internal leakage in variable-volume pumps also passes into the case  but has no passageway to return to the inlet line. All internal leakage must be  drained from the case directly to tank through a full-flow drain line. This  case-drain line should exit from the highest point on the pump so the case stays  full of fluid at all times. Always fill the case of a newly installed pump to  make sure it has lubrication at startup. Also, make sure the case-drain line  terminates below fluid level in the tank so it cannot suck air. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some pressure-compensated pumps have a maximum-volume adjusting screw to  prevent the cam ring from going to full stroke. This feature makes it possible  to adjust the maximum flow when pressure is below the compensator setting. The  feature could be used to limit maximum horsepower when only a small portion of a  higher flow pump is required. (In most circuits this feature has no use because  flow is usually controlled by flow controls or actuator size.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Two symbols can indicate pressure-compensated pumps schematically. The  complete symbol on the left shows all the functions, while the simplified symbol  on the right omits the case drain and shows the compensating arrow inside the  pump circle. Because most schematic drawings now are done on CAD systems that  automatically produce the complete symbol, the simplified symbol seldom appears  today. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pressure-compensated pumps normally do not need a relief valve to protect the  system from over pressure. However, many circuits with pressure-compensated  pumps use a relief valve just in case the pump hangs on flow. When a relief  valve, for whatever reason, is used with a pressure-compensated pump, it is  imperative that it be set 100 to 150 psi higher than the pump compensator. If  the relief valve is set lower than the compensator, the circuit will operate as  a fixed-volume setup and quickly overheat the fluid. If the relief valve is set  at the same pressure as the compensator, it is possible that the relief valve  will start to dump at the same time the compensator starts to reduce flow. Then  the pressure drop lets the relief valve shut and the compensator asks for more  flow. These oscillations can continue until the pump fatigues and fails.  &lt;/p&gt;Setting the relief valve and compensator is a four-step operation.  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the relief valve at maximum pressure.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the pump compensator at a pressure that is 200 to 300 psi higher than  final system pressure.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the relief valve 100 to 150 higher than the final compensator setting.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the pump compensator at system pressure.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt; &lt;p&gt;The other reason often stated for using a relief valve in a  pressure-compensated pump circuit is because of pressure spikes. When a  pressure-compensated pump has to instantaneously shift from full flow to no  flow, fluid leaving the pump while it is shifting to center has no place to go.  Because pressure is resistance to flow and resistance is a maximum at this  point, pressure can climb very high. These full-flow to no-flow spikes can  easily go as high as five to seven times the pump compensator setting (depending  on the pump volume). Adding a relief valve to this scenario can reduce the  spikes because a relief valve will respond much faster than a  pressure-compensated pump. However, a pilot-operated relief valve still has some  response time and will often spike two to three times its setting before opening  fully. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A better way to protect the pump and circuit is to install a small  accumulator at the pump outlet and pre-charge it to approximately 80% of set  pressure. Now when the pump must react rapidly, the accumulator provides a place  for excess fluid to go. An accumulator also helps actuator response time at  cycle start because there is a ready supply of fluid even though the pump is at  no flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Piston-type, fixed-displacement pumps &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;There are two types of piston pumps in use today. The oldest design is the  radial-piston type. Radial-piston pumps come in two different configurations.  The one shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-14&lt;/b&gt; is sometime called a check valve or  eccentric pump. The design in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-15&lt;/b&gt; is what usually comes to mind  when radial pumps are mentioned. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-14. Cross-sectional view of radial-piston pump (check  valve or eccentric type) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig814jpg_00000019833.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-14&lt;/b&gt; shows how the pistons move fluid when the  eccentric turns and strokes them forward, while springs return them. Check  valves at the piston ends allow flow from the inlet chamber and exit flow to the  outlet port. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many of these type pumps are capable of very high pressures -- up to and  exceeding 10,000 psi. At the same time they usually flow low volume -- below 6  gpm. They are highly efficient pumps, with unidirectional flow. In fact cw or  ccw shaft rotation produces the same flow rate and direction. (An eccentric pump  can be made pressure compensated and/or variable volume by restricting inlet  flow or pressurizing the area under the pistons to keep the springs from fully  extending them.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-15. Two cross-sectional views of variable-displacement  radial-piston pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig815jpg_00000019834.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Variable-displacement radial-piston pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-15&lt;/b&gt; shows a cutaway view of a basic radial-piston pump that  can function as fixed volume, variable volume, pressure compensated, and  bidirectional flow, or a combination of these functions. The pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure  8-15&lt;/b&gt; is variable volume only. As a fixed-volume pump it would have the  reaction ring offset as shown in the right hand cutaway view, with no method of  changing that condition. (This is one configuration that will probably never be  used with this design pump.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the cylinder block and pistons rotate, centrifugal force pushes the  pistons against the reaction ring. When the pump is in the on-flow condition (as  in the right-hand cutaway view), the pistons are moving out of their bores in  the lower half of the picture and forming a vacuum. Fluid is forced into the  inlet and fills these voids. As the pistons pass left center, they stop  extending and begin to be pushed back into their bores. During the top half of  their travel, the pistons force the trapped fluid through the outlet to the  circuit. Moving the reaction ring’s centerline closer to the cylinder block’s  centerline reduces flow &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pressure-compensated, radial-piston pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The radial-piston pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-16&lt;/b&gt; is pressure compensated. This  pump produces flow when the outlet pressure falls below the level set by the  pressure-adjusting screw. When pressure in the pilot line increases enough to  compress the compensator spool’s spring, pilot flow is connected to the  compensator piston, and its drain to the case is blocked. Pilot flow to the  compensator piston forces the reaction ring to move against the return spring  and reduce outlet flow. The reaction ring never reaches center because the  circuit, pilot control, and internal leakage must be overcome to hold pressure.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-16. Cross-sectional view of pressure-compensated  radial-piston pump, with symbols &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig816jpg_00000019835.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Two symbols can be used to show pressure-compensated pumps schematically. The  complete symbol at the lower right of &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-16&lt;/b&gt; shows all the  functions, while the simplified symbol above it omits the case drain and places  the compensating arrow inside the pump circle. Again, because most schematic  drawings are done on CAD systems now, the simplified symbol is seldom used. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A radial-piston pump can also produce bi-directional flow. It can take in or  force out fluid from either port while turning the same direction. This design  pump is used in closed-loop circuits where all outlet flow goes to an actuator  and return flow from the actuator goes back to the pump inlet. A common circuit  of this type is a hydrostatic drive. Fluid from a bi-directional pump goes to a  bi-directional motor to give infinitely variable output speed and force in  either direction of rotation without requiring a directional control valve. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Bi-directional, radial-piston pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-17&lt;/b&gt; has a small opposing piston that pushes  continuously against a larger control piston on the opposite side of the  reaction ring. The control piston can be pressurized or exhausted by a 3-way  servovalve, thus infinitely varying the reaction ring position to either side of  center. Input signals to the servovalve can come from manual, mechanical, or  electronic controllers. A common circuit produces four manually variable flows  and directions, using four single-solenoid directional control valves. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="485"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-17. Radial-piston pump used in bi-directional flow  circuit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig817jpg_00000019836.jpg" border="0" width="485" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A charge pump, driven off the main pump shaft, supplies pilot oil to maintain  pressure on the opposing piston. It also supplies oil to the mechanical-feedback  servovalve that pressurizes or exhausts the control piston. The charge and pilot  circuits usually run at 250 to 400 psi. Notice that the “A” and “B” ports are  only connected to the actuator -- not to tank -- when using a hydraulic motor or  double rod-end cylinder. (The pump must have added tank ports to operate a  single rod-end cylinder circuit.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-18&lt;/b&gt; shows a cutaway view and schematic drawing of a  bi-directional pump driving a single rod-end cylinder. Because there is less  volume in the rod end of a single rod-end cylinder, flow to and from that end is  less in relation to the cap end. This poses a problem when using a closed-loop  circuit. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="485"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-18. Cross-sectional view and schematic diagram of  closed-loop circuit with bi-directional pump supplying single rod-end cylinder  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43639Fig818jpg_00000019837.jpg" border="0" width="485" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The pump cutaway and schematic show how adding suction check valves, a  shuttle valve, and a bypass relief valve allow the pump to bypass excess flow  from the cap end and take in added flow for the rod end. This is a common  circuit for this type pump. With this circuit, cylinder speed is infinitely  variable and direction change requires no directional control valve. Direction  change is very smooth because flow must go to zero in one direction before it  can reverse. Because of this, the actuator rapidly and smoothly decelerates to a  stop condition. When flow reverses, it increases steadily to full flow in the  opposite direction without system shock.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Wobble-plate piston pump&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The wobble-plate piston pump design shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-19&lt;/b&gt; is one type  of inline or axial-piston pump. As the wobble plate turns, the spring-loaded  pistons reciprocate -- drawing in fluid as they spring return and discharging it  as they are forced to extend. Direction of rotation is not important for this  pump because flow is the same when it turns either way. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="251"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-19. Cross-sectional view of wobble-plate pump  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig819jpg_00000019838.jpg" border="0" width="251" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many pumps of this design operate at very high pressure and can flow high  volume as well. Another feature is the ability to isolate the outlet of one or  more pistons to give more than one flow volume to a circuit. This allows a  single pump to function like other double or triple pumps in hi-lo circuits or  to operate different actuators at various flows and pressures. This design pump  can also be made variable volume and/or pressure compensated. Some designs use a  restricted inlet to accomplish both functions because the spring-loaded pistons  will not fill as far if their inlet is restricted. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Inline or axial-piston, fixed-volume pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-20&lt;/b&gt; shows a more common design for piston pumps. This design  is seldom used as a fixed-volume pump because it can be made pressure  compensated -- which many circuits require. This design can be fixed-volume,  variable volume, pressure compensated and bi-directional flow, the same as the  radial-piston design. The main reasons for its popularity are its compact design  and its lower price. A radial-piston pump of the same flow will normally cost  four to six times as much as the inline design and be three to four times larger  physically. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-20. Cross-section view and symbol for fixed-volume  inline or axial-piston pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig820jpg_00000019839.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;An inline piston pump like the one in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-20&lt;/b&gt; is similar in design  to the wobble-plate pump. The main difference is in the way the pistons move and  stroke. An inline pump uses a fixed-angle swashplate instead of a wobble plate.  The pistons are not spring loaded but are held against the swashplate by piston  shoes and a shoe plate. The pistons are pulled out of and pushed into their  bores mechanically. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The pistons are fitted in the cylinder block, which is splined to the drive  shaft, and they turn along with the shoes and the shoe plate. As the pistons  slide down the swashplate, they are pulled out of their bores and create a  vacuum at the inlet port. Atmospheric pressure forces fluid to fill the piston  bores until the pistons reach the bottom of the swashplate angle. Fluid enters  through the kidney-shaped openings half way around one revolution. As the  cylinder block continues to turn, the pistons are forced back into their bores  and fluid discharges through the outlet. A kidney-shaped opening on the other  half of the valve plate allows fluid to flow until the pistons are fully  returned. Inline pumps always have an odd number of pistons, so one never can be  directly across from another at the transition from being pulled out to being  pushed in. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Inline piston pumps require a case drain to send bypass and/or control oil  back to tank. The drain line should be unrestricted at all times and should  terminate below the fluid level in the tank. If the drain line terminates above  fluid level, the pump housing can be vacuumed dry, causing damage to the pump.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;It is good practice to install a flow meter in the drain line. The flow meter  indicates when to change out the pump before it loses efficiency or is worn  beyond repair. A flow meter with an integral limit switch can be set to give a  warning when case drain flow goes above a specified volume. Usually a pump  should be changed when case flow is greater than 7 to 10% of maximum rated flow.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Inline piston pump efficiency runs in the 95 to 98% range. They, are very  versatile, have many control options, and would work well on any type circuit.  They are more expensive than gear and vane pumps so they lose out when price is  the deciding factor. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Variable-volume inline or axial piston pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most inline pumps have some way to change the angle of the swashplate. This  makes the pump capable of variable volume, pressure compensation, and  bi-directional flow. &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-21&lt;/b&gt; shows a variable-volume setup with a  manual control. Low-flow pumps (those under 20 gpm) can use manual controls.  Higher-flow pumps need hydraulically powered pistons to move against the higher  forces in the pump. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-21. Cross-section view and symbol for variable-volume  inline or axial-piston pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig821jpg_00000019840.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The basic operation of this pump is the same as a fixed-volume inline piston  pump. The difference here is the angle of the swashplate can be changed manually  to allow longer or shorter piston strokes for more or less volume while the pump  turns at the same speed. This feature can conserve energy when an actuator needs  variable speeds. It replaces a flow control that limits flow and either sends  excess fluid across a relief valve or forces a pressure-compensated pump to go  to high pressure and reduced flow. Other controls include manual servo, manual  handwheel, and electronic servo, to name a few. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;If this pump is in an open-loop circuit, make sure the control cannot go past  center -- or no flow -- condition. If the lever is moved left of perpendicular,  flow reverses and the pump tries to take fluid from the circuit and send it to  tank. Very soon the pump will run dry and be damaged due to lack of lubrication.  (Later in this text, a bi-directional pump circuit is shown with all the  necessary additions to make the pump work properly in a bi-directional mode.)  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Notice that the symbol in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-21&lt;/b&gt; duplicates the standard pump  symbol with a sloping arrow added to it. This indicates a pump with variable or  adjustable flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pressure-compensated inline or axial piston pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The pressure-compensated pump shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-22&lt;/b&gt; can change outlet  flow when pressure tries to go above a predetermined setting. This design pump  only has outlet flow when there is a pressure drop due to circuit demand. (Most  manufacturers offer an option to limit maximum flow when pressure drops to add  versatility to the circuit.) The maximum-volume adjusting screw keeps the  volume-destroking piston from retracting all the way even when pressure drops.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-22. Cross-section view and symbol for  pressure-compensated inline or axial-piston pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig822jpg_00000019841.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pump operation is the same as previously explained for fixed-volume inline or  axial piston pumps. The difference is that this design has a moveable swashplate  that is held on stroke by the on-stroke spring. These pumps always produce full  flow when pressure is below the compensator setting. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When this pump’s outlet flow meets resistance, pressure builds in the  pump-pressure communicating port. This pressure pushes against the spring-loaded  compensator spool. In its normal position, this spool allows fluid behind the  volume-destroking piston to go to tank through the case drain. When pressure is  high enough to force the compensator spool against its spring, the spool allows  fluid to flow into the chamber behind the volume-destroking piston while it  blocks flow to tank. Enough fluid enters the chamber behind the  volume-destroking piston to push the swashplate against its spring and start  destroking the pump. The swashplate moves to a position to stroke the pistons  just enough to makeup for the bypass and control fluid used by itself and any  fluid used in the circuit. This could be any amount of flow -- even zero.  Because of this, the pump never sends fluid to tank across a high-pressure  relief valve, so heat generation is minimal. Pump stroke varies anytime fluid is  required -- from maximum to minimum depending on circuit use. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Two symbols can be used to show pressure-compensated pumps schematically. The  complete symbol on the left shows all the functions, while the simplified symbol  on the right omits the case drain and puts the compensating arrow inside the  pump circle. Because most schematic drawings are done on CAD systems now, the  simplified symbol is seldom used. &lt;/p&gt;The inline pump design is subject two  common problems:  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Operating the pumps at high vacuum inlet can quickly deteriorate the swaged  connection between the piston and shoe (see &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-23&lt;/b&gt;). When this joint  is subjected to extra pulling and then pushing 12 to 1800 times per minute, it  wears and comes apart quickly. When it does come apart, it wrecks the swashplate  surface and the rest of the piston shoes. Most manufacturers recommend 1 psi or  less vacuum at the inlet, and indicate longer life if the pump is supercharged  by another pump at 5- to 30-psi inlet pressure.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The shoe has hollowed out areas on its face that receive oil through an  orifice in the piston as it forces fluid out. This bypass oil lubricates the  shoe and causes it to float a few micrometers off the swashplate. This happens  because the shoe’s area is greater than the area of the opposing piston. Because  there is no metal-to-metal contact between these parts, the pump has long life  expectancy. If contamination stops flow of pressurized fluid, the shoes will  contact the swashplate at high force while there is minimum lubrication. The  pump fails shortly thereafter. When possible, feed the pump with at least tank  head pressure by mounting it alongside or under the tank. Also, keep fluid  cleanliness level at least that specified by the pump manufacturer.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-23. Potential problem areas within inline-piston pumps  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig823jpg_00000019842.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As noted in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-23&lt;/b&gt;, always fill the case of a new or repaired  piston pump with fluid before startup. The pump needs lubrication and will have  very little until bypass fills the case. Also, a filled case will seal  clearances and make it easier for the pump to prime. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Fixed-volume bent-axis pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another type piston pump is the bent-axis design shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-24&lt;/b&gt;.  Like the radial piston pumps previously discussed, this is a very expensive pump  and it is physically large when all its optional features are installed.  Therefore, this design pump is not a common sight in industry. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-24. Cross-section view and symbol for fixed-volume  bent-axis hydraulic pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig824jpg_00000019843.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Its main advantage over an inline piston pump is that it holds up much better  when the inlet sees high vacuum. The piston connections are stronger and are not  prone to separating from the drive. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This type pump is manufactured in fixed-volume, variable-volume, and  pressure-compensated models, as well as with bi-directional flow and  combinations these functions. It has an efficiency range from 95 to 98% and  gives long service life when supplied with clean fluid. Most manufacturers make  this pump in low- to high-volume sizes. Most are capable of 4000 psi and more.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway view of a fixed-volume bent-axis pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-24&lt;/b&gt; shows  that as the drive shaft turns, the cylinder block also turns at the same rate  through the universal drive link. Because the cylinder block is at an angle to  the drive shaft, the pistons reciprocate in their bores. The pistons draw in  fluid during one half of each revolution and discharge fluid during the other  half. Kidney-shaped openings in the valve plate direct the fluid in and out of  the piston bores. Because the housing is a single piece, the angle and volume is  fixed for a given rpm. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Variable-volume, pressure-compensated bent-axis pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-25&lt;/b&gt; shows a bent-axis pump that is capable  of variable volume as well as pressure compensation. This means the pump output  can be varied by a manual control or it can automatically change as pressure  increases to a predetermined setting. (This cutaway represents only one way such  a pump might be built.) The operates in the same way as the pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure  8-24&lt;/b&gt;, but the angle of the cylinder block can vary to reduce flow on a  pressure demand. Also, the maximum-volume screw can limit the maximum angle of  the cylinder block to establish maximum flow. This is an option on many  manufacturers’ designs. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-25. Cross-section view and symbol for variable-volume  pressure-compensated bent-axis pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig825jpg_00000019844.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As pressure at the outlet builds to the setting of the pressure adjustment,  the compensator spool is pushed back. The spool forces the compensator piston to  push the cylinder block to a lesser angle. When pressure reaches the preset  level, the cylinder block stays in any position required to maintain the flow  needed at the preset pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Two symbols can be used to show pressure-compensated pumps schematically. The  complete symbol on the left shows all the functions, while the simplified symbol  on the right omits the case drain and shows the compensating arrow inside the  pump circle. Because most schematic drawings are done on CAD systems now, the  simplified symbol is seldom used. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-26&lt;/b&gt; shows the symbol and a cutaway view of a bi-directional,  bent-axis pump for closed-loop circuits. This pump operates in the same manner  as the previously described bent-axis pumps, but is capable of drawing in and  discharging fluid from either port while turning the same direction. This design  needs an external pilot supply because it has no integral pilot pump. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-26. Cross-section view and symbol for bi-directional  bent-axis pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig826jpg_00000019845.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway shows optional features such as: maximum-volume screws in both  flow directions and a proportional-control valve for infinitely variable flow  from either port. Manual, mechanical, and solenoid controls also are available.  A control piston that is offset by a resisting piston with a smaller diameter  moves the cylinder block. The 3-way servovalve ports fluid to or exhausts fluid  from the larger piston to position the cylinder block. This pump design is not  readily available currently, but there still are many of them operating in the  field. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Load-sensing function &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;All pumps that can be pressure compensated can also be made load sensing.  Load sensing is a control technique that keeps the pump compensator from holding  full pressure until an actuator stalls. Normally a pressure-compensated pump  circuit operates at full compensator pressure setting unless an actuator is  using all the pump flow. While an actuator is using all pump flow, pressure is  whatever it takes to move the load. This is an ideal setup because all energy --  except for component inefficiencies -- is being used to do work. There is no  wasted energy except for inefficiencies and very little heat is generated. A  load-sensing circuit uses a feedback signal from the actuator that keeps pump  pressure at 100 to 300 psi above the load. Some load-sensing pumps have a fixed  differential while others are adjustable. When no actuator is moving, system  pressure is at the load-sensing setting of 100 to 300 psi instead of the  compensator setting. Energy savings is the main advantage of a load-sensing  function, but it also makes a non-compensated flow control perform like it is  pressure compensated. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-27. Schematic diagram of pressure-compensated  closed-center load-sensing circuit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig827jpg_00000019846.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The schematic drawing in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-27&lt;/b&gt; is a typical load-sensing circuit  with two actuators. Notice that the sensing lines from the actuator flow lines  to the pump compensator. A load-sensing pump must be able to read any load it is  powering so that ample pressure can be maintained. Also notice that the  load-sensing lines go through check valves to isolate the flow lines from each  other. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;All flow controls in a load-sensing circuit must be meter-in type so pressure  at the actuator is always high enough to move the load. In the case of the  vertical cylinder, a counterbalance valve keeps it from running away while  extending. Notice that the load-sensing line from the rod end of the vertical  cylinder is connected between the counterbalance valve and the directional  control valve so it does not see a load when the circuit is at rest. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Because the pump is pressure compensated, the directional control valve’s  pump port is blocked in center position. This circuit uses a bar manifold with  modular meter-in flow controls and a modular “B” port counterbalance valve  sandwiched under float-center directional control valves for piping convenience  and leak prevention. The lines connected to the “A” and “B” ports below the  meter-in flow controls go to isolation check valves, then on to the load-sensing  connection. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;With the circuit at rest as shown, the load-sensing connection sees little or  no pressure because the actuator ports are connected to tank. At this point,  circuit pressure is equal to the load-sensing bias spring, regardless of the  setting of the adjustable compensator spring. At this low pressure, the circuit  consumes very little horsepower and generates little heat. The pump’s internal  parts are subject to low stress, which makes them last longer and maintain high  efficiency &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When a cylinder cycles, the load-sensing connection sees whatever pressure it  takes to move it. Pump outlet pressure rises to load pressure plus load-sensing  bias-spring force. When both cylinders operate simultaneously, the load-sensing  connection receives pressure from the highest load through the isolation check  valves. Pump pressure is always that needed to move the highest load plus a  value added by the load-sensing bias spring. (Some load-sensing bias springs are  adjustable within a narrow range.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When load-sensing valves have low or no bypass flow, use shuttle valves in  place of the isolation check valves. Shuttle valves will not trap backflow when  a directional control valve shifts to center position. Check the chosen pump to  see if this feature is standard, must be specified, or is not available. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Load-sensing, fixed-volume pumps &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The oldest load-sensing circuits for fixed-volume pumps are like those  diagrammed in &lt;b&gt;Figures 8-9 and 8-10&lt;/b&gt;. The pumps in these circuits never  operate at a higher pressure than work resistance and never send fluid across  the relief valve unless there is a malfunction in the hydraulics or control  circuit. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-28&lt;/b&gt; diagrams a simple load-sensing pump circuit using standard  valves. A pilot-operated relief valve with a 70-psi spring dumps pump flow to  tank at 70 psi when the vent port is at 0 psi. A shuttle valve receives pressure  feedback from the actuator and signals the pilot-operated relief valve’s vent  port with the actual working pressure. As the actuator moves at a reduced speed,  pump pressure stays 70 psi above actual load pressure, so excess flow that goes  to tank wastes less energy. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-28. Schematic diagram of fixed-volume pump in  closed-center load-sensing circuit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig828jpg_00000019847.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Several manufacturers offer fixed-volume pumps with integral load-sensing  valves. Hookup is simple for these pumps, and in some designs, bias pressure can  be adjusted. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This setup is not as efficient as a pressure-compensated pump with load  sensing, but it always provides an advantage in fixed-volume pump circuits. The  results are best when maximum system pressure is high and actuator’s extension  and retraction speeds are low. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Horsepower- and/or torque-limiting pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Horsepower or torque limiting is another control technique that only works on  pumps that are capable of variable volume. Its main application is in the  mobile-equipment field, where most hydraulic circuits are powered by gas or  diesel engines. These engines usually must move the machine as well. To maximize  actuator speed and force while minimizing horsepower drain, all actuators can be  fast at low loads but still able to move heavy loads without pulling excess  horsepower. Each manufacturer that supplies this setup may have a different way  of doing it. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-29. Schematic diagram of horsepower- or  torque-limiting pump control &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig829jpg_00000019848.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-29&lt;/b&gt; shows the schematic diagram of a circuit with a  horsepower-limiting pump. A pressure-compensator adjustment still controls  maximum output pressure but the preset limiting valve can reduce flow as  pressure increases. Reducing flow as pressure increases keeps horsepower or  torque from exceeding a preset limit. The horsepower/torque limiter is preset  for a given pressure and flow. This system could be useful in an accumulator  circuit to allow higher flow as pressure decreases while limiting horsepower  draw as pressure climbs. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Typical circuit for pressure-compensated pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most pressure-compensated pumps use a closed-center circuit such as the one  in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-30&lt;/b&gt;. These circuits could have load sensing or other controls.  They usually include multiple actuators. Closed-center circuits typically  operate at maximum system pressure and output flow matches the circuit  requirement. Flow controls keep actuators at operating speed because maximum  flow may make them move too rapidly. Flow controls also make it possible for  more than one actuator to move simultaneously without affecting their stroke  times. Note that flow controls also increase heat generation because the moving  or work force may not require full system pressure. Also, some actuators may  require pressure-reducing valves to lower the maximum force so that it doesn’t  cause damage. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-30. Schematic diagram of typical pressure-compensated  pump circuit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig830jpg_00000019849.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Normally, pressure-compensated pumps do not need relief valves to protect  their systems from overpressure. However, many circuits with  pressure-compensated pumps include a relief valve just in case the pump hangs on  flow. When a relief valve, for whatever reason, is used on a  pressure-compensated pump, it is imperative that the relief valve is set 100 to  150 psi higher than the pump compensator. If the relief valve is set lower than  the compensator, the circuit will operate as a fixed-volume setup and quickly  overheat the fluid. If the relief valve is set at the same pressure as the  compensator, the relief valve can start to dump as the compensator starts to  reduce flow. Then pressure drop lets the relief valve shut and the compensator  ask for more flow. This oscillating action can continue until the pump fatigues  and fails. &lt;/p&gt;Setting the relief valve and compensator is a four-step  operation:  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the relief valve at maximum pressure.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the pump compensator at a pressure 200 to 300 psi higher than the final  relief valve pressure.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the relief valve 100 to 150 psi higher than the final compensator  setting.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Set the pump compensator at system pressure.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another reason often stated for using a relief valve in a  pressure-compensated pump circuit is because of pressure spikes. When a  pressure-compensated pump has to instantaneously shift from full flow to no  flow, fluid leaving the pump while it is shifting to center has no place to go.  Because pressure is resistance to flow and resistance is maximum at this point,  pressure can climb very high. These full-flow-to-no-flow spikes can easily go up  to five to seven times the pump compensator setting, depending on the pump  volume. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Adding a relief valve to this scenario can reduce the spikes because a relief  valve will respond much faster than a pressure-compensated pump. However, a  pilot-operated relief valve still has some response time and will often spike  two to three times its setting before opening fully. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A better way to protect the pump and circuit is to install a small  accumulator at the pump outlet, pre-charged to approximately 80% of set  pressure. Now, when the pump must react quickly, the excess fluid can go into  the accumulator with very little pressure spike. An accumulator also helps  actuator response time at cycle start because there is a ready supply of fluid  even though the pump is at no flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another consideration is pump priming when a pressure-compensated pump is  mounted above fluid level. When a system first starts (and sometimes when it has  not been operated recently), the inlet line holds no oil above tank level.  Atmospheric air in this line above fluid level must be evacuated before  atmospheric pressure can push fluid in. Because most pressure-compensated pumps  operate against a closed-center circuit, there is no place for this trapped air  to go. Hydraulic pumps may easily move 100 gpm of fluid at 3000 psi, but they  are very poor air movers. At startup, the pump never primes and could be damaged  from lack of lubrication -- especially if the case has not been filled. Usually  the outlet line is opened at a union or some other fitting and the pump primes  as soon as the trapped air can leave. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A better approach is to install the air-bleed valve shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure  8-31&lt;/b&gt;. This valve is not required in most cases when the pump is along side  or below the tank because filling the tank should also fill the inlet line. It  is also seldom required with a fixed-volume pump in an open-center circuit  because the pump outlet has a direct path to tank. However, when priming is a  problem and there are no inlet line leaks or restrictions, then the air-bleeds  valve may be required. The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-30&lt;/b&gt; shows the correct  location and piping for this valve. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-31. Cross-section view and symbol for typical  air-bleed valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig831jpg_00000019850.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-31&lt;/b&gt; shows the internal configuration of a  typical air-bleed valve. The poppet in this valve normally is held open by a  light spring, so trapped air can flow easily through its flow orifices to tank.  When the pump primes and oil tries to flow through these orifices, pressure  builds and the poppet closes. The poppet stays closed as long as the pump is  running. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Always pipe the air bleed valve as close to the pump outlet as possible. Any  oil in the line must be pushed out before trapped air can be exhausted, so the  closer the better. Always terminate the air bleed valve’s outlet below fluid  level. If it terminates above fluid level, air can pass through the valve and  let oil in the pump return to tank. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Closed-loop circuits &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-32&lt;/b&gt; is a typical hydrostatic-transmission  setup. It uses a variable volume, bi-directional pump to drive a hydraulic motor  at infinitely variable speed. Hydrostatic drives are normally used to drive  vehicles but can be used in industrial applications where smooth acceleration,  deceleration, and reversing are required. These circuits usually incorporate an  inline or axial-piston pump coupled to a variety of hydraulic motors. As a  closed-loop circuit, all pump flow goes to the motor and all motor flow returns  to the pump. With 100% efficient parts, the circuit could run with the same oil  its whole life. In the real world however, the hydraulic motor and  bi-directional pump have internal bypass so a fixed-volume charge pump is placed  in the circuit to make up for leaks. The charge pump can also supply fluid to  control circuits and accessory devices. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-32. Schematic diagram of typical hydrostatic drive  circuit &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig832jpg_00000019851.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The charge pump inlet draws fluid from a reservoir through a low-micron  filter and sends it to the inlets of the charge check valves. When the hydraulic  motor is not turning, any fluid not used by the closed loop goes through the  charge-pump relief valve, then back to tank through the pump case and a heat  exchanger. When the hydraulic motor is turning, all charge flow goes to the  low-pressure side of the loop through one of the charge check valves, the  hot-oil bypass valve, and the hot-oil bypass relief valve at a lower pressure.  This action makes sure the closed loop receives cooled, filtered oil that can  carry away heat and contamination. It also sends cool, clean oil through the  motor and pump case to flush contamination and dissipate heat. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Small hydrostatic pumps can be controlled manually, hydraulically, or electro  hydraulically. Larger systems cannot be controlled manually, due to the high  force required to move the swashplate. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The system-relief valves protect the hydraulic motor and bi-directional pump  from excess pressure when the motor is powered. When the pump center’s motor  outlet flow is blocked, the motor may be driven by external forces and cannot  stop immediately. At this time, the system-relief valves allow fluid from the  motor -- now acting like a pump -- to bypass at high pressure to the opposite  motor port. This allows the motor to stop smoothly even when an operator tries  to stop it abruptly. (Other options to protect the circuit from bypassing  through the system-relief valves during deceleration are available from most  suppliers.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Bi-rotational pumps &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Unirotational pumps can only move fluid when rotating in one direction. These  pumps usually have a larger inlet port in relation to the outlet port size. They  are limited as to inlet-outlet function because internal bypass is always ported  to the housing on the inlet side. This means all internal bypass goes to the  case and then back to the pump inlet. Because all pumps have a shaft sticking  out of the housing, there must be a seal to stop fluid leak when the pump is at  rest and vacuum leak when it is running. A unirotational pump could move fluid  when turning either way but the shaft seal would blow above 25- to 50-psi outlet  pressure in reverse flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Bi-rotational pumps can move fluid while turning in either direction of  rotation if they are piped correctly. Both ports on these pumps are usually  sized as inlets. &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-33&lt;/b&gt; shows a cutaway view of a bi-rotational pump  with internal check valves that allow bypass to go to the inlet side of the  pump. Bi-rotational pumps are mainly used on mobile equipment where the prime  mover cannot easily change direction of rotation. This means right- and  left-hand rotation pumps would have to be kept to satisfy different pieces of  equipment. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-33. Cross-sectional view and symbol for bi-directional  pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig833jpg_00000019852.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;In industrial applications where a 3-phase motor’s direction of rotation can  be easily changed, pump rotation direction is not important. There is only one  instance where a left-hand rotation pump must be specified. This is the case  where a double-shafted electric motor drives a pump at both shafts. One of the  pumps in this application must be setup for left-hand rotation. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pump horsepower &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Two formulas often used to figure hydraulic pump horsepower are:&lt;br /&gt;hp =  (psi)(gpm)/1714 -- (to calculate pure horsepower), and&lt;br /&gt;hp =  (psi)(gpm)/1714(actual pump efficiency).&lt;br /&gt;Normally efficiency is assumed to be  85% because most new industrial pumps are at or above this figure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The first formula is for a known pump volume -- figured from its cubic  inches/revolution times the number of revolutions per minute. Say this  displacement at 1200 rpm came to 12 gpm, but a flow meter at the pump outlet  only shows 10.6 gpm at 1000 psi. The pump is still moving 12 gpm as far as its  horsepower requirement is concerned, but the speed of the driven device will be  that produced by 10.6 gpm. The 12-gpm pump was picked because the actual flow  required was at least 10 gpm. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The second formula is applied when pump efficiency is known and horsepower is  being figured for the actual 10-gpm requirement. Now pump efficiency must be  considered because theoretical flow is greater than 10 gpm, and the electric  motor must be able to pump the extra fluid even though it does not get to the  actuator. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;These two formulas can be simplified to:&lt;br /&gt;hp = 0.000583 (gpm)(psi) -- (for  pure horsepower), and&lt;br /&gt;hp = 0.0007 (gpm)(psi) -- (for an 85% efficiency  pump).&lt;br /&gt;A common rule of thumb is: 1 gpm at 1500 psi = 1 hp.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most suppliers’ catalogs show the horsepower required to drive a given pump  at different pressures. These figures are usually conservative so designers can  use them with confidence. Also, most electric motors can operate continuously at  110% of nameplate rating (and up to 140% for short bursts). Remember too that  the only time a fixed-volume pump will be at full flow and full pressure is when  the device it is driving has stalled. A pressure-compensated pump draws the  highest horsepower just before it starts reducing flow slightly below its  pressure setting. That event usually is not of long duration. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many formula-data books have horsepower charts that make picking an electric  motor simple. These charts are usually based on the 85% efficiency formula. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Cavitation&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Next to contamination, cavitation causes more pump damage than anything else.  Cavitation occurs when a pump needs 10.8 gpm at its inlet, but only gets 10.5  gpm. The missing 3 gpm winds up as voids or vacuum bubbles that implode when  they go from suction to pressure. The implosions are rapid and damaging to  adjacent surfaces when outlet pressure is high. They can take a pump out of  service in hours. When outlet pressure is low -- under 200 psi -- there is still  some noise and damage but it is minimal. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some mobile equipment shuts the inlet to their pumps when the equipment  travels, only allowing 1or 2 % of pump flow. This small volume goes through an  open-center circuit at less that 15 psi, so implosions are not a problem.  Another advantage is fuel savings. Because pump flow is so low, horsepower drain  is much less. &lt;/p&gt; Cavitation comes from several situations that are easy to  rectify:  &lt;ul type="square"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Long suction lines with many turns.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Undersize suction lines.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The pump mounted too far above the fluid.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Fluid viscosity too high (either wrong viscosity or low temperature).  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A collapsed suction hose.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Turning the pump faster than the manufacturer recommends.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A clogged inlet strainer  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;A blocked air breather (especially in circuits with oversize rods or  single-acting cylinders).&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; &lt;p&gt;Any of the above could be eliminated immediately with a supercharging pump.  This is a separate pump operating at low pressure (usually under 30 psi), that  forces fluid to the system pump inlet. &lt;/p&gt; Most of these conditions also can be  eliminated by good design practices:  &lt;ul type="square"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Locate the pump close to the tank -- preferably alongside or under it.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Never use a suction line smaller than the pump inlet port.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Use the fluid recommended by the pump supplier, and install tank heaters if  the system will be exposed to temperatures below 65°F.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Never use pressure hose for suction lines. The lining of a pressure hose is  not firmly attached to its body and can collapse under vacuum. Use hose  specifically designed for suction service.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;When a pump must turn faster than recommended, install a supercharging pump  or elevate the tank to provide head pressure. Make sure a vacuum gauge at the  pump inlet never goes above 1.5 to 3 psi.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Use a good filtering system – rated at least 10 µ -- so the suction strainer  cannot block flow. Consider the suction strainer as insurance against startup  contamination large enough to wreck a pump instantaneously.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another situation that occurs in suction lines is air leaks. Air leaks are  not cavitation but make the same noises and damage as vacuum cavitation. The  only way to tell the difference in these situations is to look at the oil in the  tank. If the oil is foamy from aeration, there is an air leak in the circuit. If  the fluid is clear or almost clear of bubbles, there is a vacuum cavitation  problem. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Air leak problems can come from poor piping practices. It is best to never  use a standard pipe union in the inlet line. It is practically impossible to  seal a standard union against an air inlet leak. Plumb the inlet line with as  few fittings as possible and make sure any joints are sealed. If a plumbing  connection is suspect, apply some of the system fluid to each joint to see if  the noise stops. This type air leak problem usually shows up at system start. It  seldom happens to a running circuit. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;On systems that have been running for some time, a good place to look for air  leaks is at the pump shaft seal. Fixed-volume pumps have their drive shaft  sticking out of the housing and inside the housing is suction vacuum. When a  shaft seal wears or is damaged from heat, it may let atmospheric air in before  it lets oil leak out. The oil application test works here also, but can be messy  because of shaft rotation speed. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The suction line is the most important line on the hydraulic circuit. Fluid  can be pushed through pressure lines but a suction line only has one atmosphere  (approximately 14.7 psi at sea level) with which to work. Most pumps are  slightly damaged above 3 psi. At 4 psi and higher, cavitation noise is evident  and pump damage escalates. Higher vacuum accelerates the damage. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;What causes cavitation damage?&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Erosion is the result of cavitation implosions as fluid passes from the inlet  side of a pump to the outlet side. &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-34&lt;/b&gt; shows how the change from  vacuum to pressure makes the vacuum or air voids collapse or implode. At low  pressure, these voids merely close up and no damage is done. At high pressure,  the fluid does not stop when the void is full but continues at high velocity  through the void and impinges metal surfaces to the point of getting into the  metal’s pores. Pressure drops as the next pulse of fluid approaches and  high-pressure fluid in the metal pores rushes back out. During this part of the  cycle, some very small particles of metal are dislodged and a cavity starts to  form. Because this high- to low-pressure cycle can happen more than 200 times  per second on a 12-vane pump at 1200 rpm, it is easy to understand how a pump  can be physically damaged so quickly. These implosions are in the area where  metal against metal is the only sealing action between vacuum and system  pressure, so once the metal erodes, pump efficiency decreases because fluid  bypasses through the damaged area. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-34. Representation of erosion from implosions  impinging on metal caused by cavitation or air leaks &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig834jpg_00000019853.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pump-motor alignment&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most hydraulic pumps have light bearings while the electric motors by which  they are driven have heavy-duty bearings. This makes it extremely important that  the alignment of the pump and motor shaft be near perfect. Angular or offset  misalignment always results in pump bearing failure, followed by internal  failure soon after startup. Shaft couplings can take care of minor  inconsistencies in shaft alignment, but they wear out very soon when not  properly applied. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-35&lt;/b&gt; illustrates examples of misalignment. When the pump and  motor are mounted separately, they must be aligned as nearly perfect as  possible. Straight edges, dial indicators, and lasers give accuracy ranging from  low tech to high tech, but they are only part of the answer. The pump and motor  must sit on a rigid base and must be held down with ample force so they do not  slip around during operation. The best alignment job possible can be rendered  useless by inadequate mounting hardware. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-35. Correct way to belt-drive a pump &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig835jpg_00000019854.jpg" border="0" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A simple way to overcome alignment problems is to use the pump-motor adapter  shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 8-35&lt;/b&gt;. The pump-motor adapter is attached to a “C” face  electric motor that has a flat-machined face and pilot protrusion. This face and  pilot are perpendicular to the shaft and concentric to very close tolerances. A  matching pilot and face are machined on the pump. The pump-motor adapter has  matching machined faces and pilot bores. It is purchased for a particular motor  and pump, so it is the right length for the shafts specified and matches the  motor and pump mounting flanges. When this assembly is bolted together all parts  align perfectly. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The shaft coupling then is slipped together and its setscrews tightened  through the access port provided. The motor can be mounted on almost any surface  without a chance of misalignment, and the pump can be changed without alignment  problems anytime or place. Always use a coupling guard with an open coupling  arrangement. Install the access-port cover before operating the pump when using  the pump-motor adapter setup. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-35&lt;/b&gt; also shows the correct way to drive a pump with a belt.  Light bearings on the pump cannot stand the side loads from belts so the pump  fails very soon. Use pillow-block bearings to take the side load and couple the  pump to the bearing guided shaft. This arrangement gives long service in  applications where belts must be used. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Testing a pump&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 8-36&lt;/b&gt; shows a typical setup for testing a pump that is suspect,  has been out of service, or has been rebuilt. The flow meter could be an added  device if the unit does not have one. It could be part of a test stand setup but  is a necessary item when checking pump efficiency. The loading valve could be a  ball valve as shown in the figure or another type valve as long as it can take  the maximum pressure it will see. The relief valve must be in place and set for  maximum rated pressure or operating pressure as needed. A pressure gauge is  required to indicate system pressure. The filter should be part of a standard  hydraulic power unit, but would usually be an off-line setup on a test stand.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="485"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 8-36. Test set-up for repaired pumps &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/43640Fig836jpg_00000019855.jpg" border="0" width="485" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To test a pump, lower the relief valve pressure setting to minimum. Then  start the electric motor and check for flow on the flow meter. The meter should  read at or very near catalog rating with all flow going directly to tank. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;If the meter shows the pump producing ample flow, start closing the loading  valve and watch the pressure gauge as it climbs. The reading should be low  because the relief valve is set low. When the loading valve is closed  completely, reset the relief valve to test pressure and observe the flow meter.  Flow will drop somewhat, depending on the type of pump being tested. Most  manufacturers publish rated flow at pressure in their literature. If the flow  meter reads at or near cataloged rated flow, the pump is ready to put in  service. If not, the pump should be checked or rebuilt to bring it up to  specification. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Other pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Chapter 18 covers air- and hydraulic-driven intensifiers or boosters, which  technically are pumps. These units usually are associated with air-oil systems.  That is why their descriptions are in Chapter 18. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Air-to-hydraulic intensifiers are 100% efficient in the hydraulic end and are  pressure compensated. They usually produce low volume so they are not normally  used as a system’s prime mover. Their main advantage is they can hold pressure  for long periods without generating heat or consuming energy. (Check out Chapter  17 to learn more about this unique pumping system.) &lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-557791188757434708?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/557791188757434708/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_3703.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/557791188757434708'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/557791188757434708'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_3703.html' title='المضخات الهيدروليكيه'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-5753191019865714994</id><published>2009-07-08T09:18:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T09:57:25.821-07:00</updated><title type='text'>الصمامات الهيدروليكيه</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h2&gt;SLIP-IN CARTRIDGE VALVES&lt;/h2&gt; &lt;p&gt;The term &lt;i&gt;cartridge valves&lt;/i&gt; commonly refers to screw-in types of  pressure, directional, and flow control valves. Screw-in type cartridge valves  are mostly low-flow valves -- 20 gpm or less, although some manufacturers’  valves can handle more than 100 gpm. Screw-in cartridges are very compact,  develop low-pressure drop, have little leakage, and produce inexpensive circuits  that are reliable and easy to maintain. Screw-in cartridges are most often part  of a drilled manifold but also are available in individual bodies. The function  and performance of screw-in cartridge valves are the same as in-line or  subplate-mounted valves. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Slip-in cartridge valves are different because -- except for pressure  controls -- they are simply 2-way, bi-directional, pilot-to-close check valves.  Most circuits using slip-in cartridge valves flow at least 60 gpm and can go as  high as 3000 gpm. Slip-in cartridges are compact, develop low-pressure drop, and  operate at pressures to 5000 psi. Slip-in cartridges can function as pressure,  flow, and directional control valves. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-1. 1:1 Poppet-type cartridge valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850fig41gif_00000050278.gif" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-1 shows a cutaway view and symbol of a 1:1 area ratio, poppet-type  cartridge valve. Pressure relief, sequence, unloading, and counterbalance  functions normally use a 1:1 area ratio poppet. The area ratio is the relation  of the pilot area to the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port area. The 1:1 area valve stays closed  when pilot pressure is equal to or greater than the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-2 shows a cutaway view and symbol for a 1:1.1 area ratio valve. Here  the pilot area is 1.1 times the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port area. Use this 1:1.1 ratio for  special directional controls where system pressure at the pilot area must hold  against excess pressure at the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port. Some pressure control applications  also use this area ratio. Flow is possible from &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; to &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt;, or  &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; to &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; with low or no pilot pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="232"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-2. 1:1.1 Poppet-type cartridge valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig42gif_00000050279.gif" width="232" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-3 shows a cutaway and symbol for a 1:2 area ratio cartridge valve.  Most directional-valve functions use this area ratio. Here, pilot area is twice  the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; or &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port area. The 1:2 ratio valve allows flow from  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; to &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; or &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; to &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; with the same pressure drop. When  the pilot area sees the same pressure as the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; and/or &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt;, all flow  stops. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="225"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-3. 1:2 Poppet-type cartridge valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig43gif_00000050280.gif" width="225" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge pressure-relief valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The schematic symbol and cutaway in Figure 4-4 are for a slip-in cartridge  relief valve. The symbol for a cartridge is more pictorial than for spool  valves, though the pressure-adjusting section uses a conventional ISO symbol.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="397"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-4. Slip-in cartridge relief valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig44gif_00000050281.gif" width="397" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pressure relief cartridges can only flow from port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; to port &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt;.  Port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; is always connected to the pump while port &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; is always  connected to tank. The spring that holds the poppet in place allows it to open  at about 30 psi. This internal spring seats the poppet regardless of valve  mounting position. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A slip-in cartridge valve has a cover that contains porting relative to the  function the valve will perform and an adjustable spring-loaded poppet (the  adjustable relief). This cover also holds the slip-in cartridge in place. The  slip-in cartridge has a bushing with seals to prevent leakage to the outside or  across the ports. This bushing fits in a machined cavity and contains the poppet  that moves to allow fluid to pass. The poppet on a relief valve has a ratio of  1:1, which means the areas at the working fluid side, at the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port, and  at the pilot side are equal. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Drilled pilot passages allow fluid to flow through control orifices to the  pilot area of the poppet and to the adjustable relief in the cover. As system  pressure increases, the poppet sees the same pressure on both sides and stays  closed . . . held by the 30-psi spring. When system pressure reaches the relief  setting, the adjustable relief opens a small amount, allowing pilot flow to  tank. When pilot flow to tank is greater than control orifice flow from the A  port, pressure on top of the poppet lowers. Then the poppet unseats to pass  excess pump flow to tank. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-5 shows the same cartridge relief valve with a single-solenoid  directional valve -- or venting valve -- mounted on the cover. This  solenoid-operated relief holds maximum pressure with the solenoid energized and  unloads the pump to tank at approximately 30 psi when the solenoid is  de-energized. Reversing the solenoid coil and spring keeps the pump loaded until  the venting valve is energized. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="272"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-5. Slip-in cartridge relief valve  (solenoid-operated, normally vented) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig45gif_00000050282.gif" width="272" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-6 shows the symbol for a dual-pressure relief valve with pump  unloading. Pressures are set at the two manually adjustable relief covers and  the solenoids select which relief to use. When both solenoids are de-energized,  the pump unloads. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="260"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-6. Slip-in cartridge relief valve  (solenoid-operated, normally vented) for two different pressures &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig46gif_00000050283.gif" width="260" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The symbol in Figure 4-7 is for an infinitely variable cartridge relief  valve. A proportional solenoid valve is mounted on the cover of this 1:1  cartridge. The proportional solenoid valve controls vent flow, which in turn  controls pressure. An electronic signal sets infinitely variable pressure to  protect the system in varying conditions. The manually adjusted relief cover  under the proportional solenoid sets maximum system pressure regardless of  electrical input. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="261"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-7. Slip-in cartridge relief valve. (Relief valve is  proportional-solenoid operated.) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig47gif_00000050284.gif" width="261" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-8 shows the symbol for a relief valve with a low-pressure unloading  port. Set the relief cover for maximum pressure as before. Then, when it reaches  maximum pressure, the relief cartridge opens to unload the pump at approximately  30 psi. Venting pressure comes from piping the unloading port downstream of a  check valve that holds fluid in the accumulator. Until there is about a 15%  pressure drop in the accumulator holding circuit, the pump will stay unloaded.  When pressure drops about 15%, the relief cartridge closes until system pressure  reaches maximum setting again. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge pressure-reducing valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="283"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-8. Slip-in cartridge -- pressure relief and  unloading (infinitely variable pressure) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig48gif_00000050285.gif" width="283" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The schematic symbol and cutaway in Figure 4-9 are for a cartridge  pressure-reducing valve. The ISO symbols for the cartridge and the  pressure-reducing section are conventional. Pressure-reducing cartridges only  flow from port &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; to port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;. Port &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; always sees inlet or  system pressure, while port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; is the reduced-pressure outlet. If reverse  flow is necessary, add a bypass check valve to allow return flow around the  reducing valve. The spring directly holding the spool in place keeps it open  regardless of valve mounting position when pressure is below the adjustable  relief setting. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="490"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-9. Slip-in cartridge reducing valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig49gif_00000050286.gif" width="490" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The slip-in cartridge reducing valve has a cover that contains porting  relative to the function to be performed. An adjustable spring-loaded poppet  (the adjustable relief) in the cover sets outlet pressure. This cover also holds  the slip-in cartridge in place. The cartridge has a bushing with seals to  prevent leakage to the outside or across the ports. This bushing fits in a  machined cavity and contains the spool that closes as pressure increases. The  spool on a reducing valve has a ratio of 1:1 -- which means that the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;  port area and pilot area are equal. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A drilled pilot passage allows fluid to flow through a pressure-compensated  control orifice to the adjustable relief in the cover, as well as to the top of  the spool. As pressure builds, the spool stays open because of the spring and  the equal pressures on equal areas, thus letting flow continue through the  valve. When the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port reaches the reduced pressure setting, the  adjustable relief opens and pilot fluid flows to tank through the drain. When  pilot flow is greater than control orifice flow, lower pressure on top of the  spool allows it to rise, blocking flow from the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;  port. Pressure at the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port will not exceed that set on the adjustable  relief unless a load-induced pressure tries to force flow back through the  closed spool. There will be pilot flow out the drain port whenever the reducing  valve is at reduced pressure. Blocking or closing the drain port causes the  spool to fully open and allow outlet pressure to reach system pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A pressure-reducing valve will not allow reverse flow after it has reached  its set pressure. For example, if the reduced pressure is 500 psi at a cylinder  and some outside force starts pushing against the cylinder, there is no place  for most of the fluid to go. About 50 to 100 in.3/min of excess fluid passes  through the pilot circuit and out the drain port while the valve is reducing.  Fluid in excess of drain flow becomes trapped and pressure builds, possibly to  dangerous levels. If there is a chance of outside forces that can increase  outlet pressure, add a relief valve bypass at the outlet. A bypass relief valve  relieves trapped fluid before excessive pressure can damage the valve or  machine. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-10 shows a cartridge reducing valve with dual-pressure capabilities.  A solenoid-operated selector valve and a second adjustable relief mounted on the  cover give the option of two pressures. Always use the first adjustable relief  above the spool for maximum pressure setting. A single-solenoid directional  valve (as shown) allows default to maximum pressure. Using a 2-position detented  directional valve maintains the last pressure selected. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="304"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-10. Slip-in cartridge reducing valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig410gif_00000050287.gif" width="304" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-11 shows a proportional solenoid valve mounted on the adjustable  relief. Such a valve allows selection of infinitely variable pressures via an  electrical command. Allowing pilot flow to bypass the adjustable relief gives a  reduced pressure of anything lower than the adjustable relief setting. An  electronic signal to the proportional solenoid varies pilot flow that controls  pressure on top of the spool. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="323"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-11. Slip-in cartridge reducing valve (proportional  operated, Infinitely variable pressure) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig411gif_00000050288.gif" width="323" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge directional control valves&lt;br /&gt;Slip-in cartridge check  valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The simplest directional control valve is a check valve. Figure 4-12 shows  the symbol and cutaway for a cartridge check valve. A check valve has a cover  with a control orifice to control pilot fluid. The control orifice dampens the  poppet movement. It is available in several diameters. The cover also holds the  cartridge in place and seals it with an O-ring. The cartridge has a bushing with  seals to prevent leakage to the outside or across the ports. A machined cavity  holds the bushing that contains the poppet that will open when fluid flows in  the right direction. The poppet on a check valve has a 1:2 ratio, which means  the area at the two working ports (&lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; or &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt;) is one half of the  pilot area. A 1:2 ratio poppet allows flow in either direction as long as pilot  pressure is off or slightly less than half the working pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="483"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-12. Slip-in cartridge check valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig412gif_00000050289.gif" width="483" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;There are several spring forces available -- from as low as 5 psi to more  than 70 psi. The lowest spring pressure possible is best for normal check valve  operation. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In Figure 4-12, a drilled pilot passage senses the pressure at the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;  port. Flow from the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port passes with a slight  pressure drop caused by the volume of flow plus the spring force. When flow  tries to reverse (from the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port) as pressure on  the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port half area increases, it goes through the pilot passage to the  main pilot area. Because the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port area is only half the pilot area, the  poppet stays closed and blocks reverse flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-13 shows the same valve with the pilot passage drilled to the  &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port. With this valve, flow is free to go from &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; to &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt;,  but not from &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; to &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="227"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-13. Slip-in cartridge check valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig413gif_00000050290.gif" width="227" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The symbol and cutaway in Figure 4-14 are for a cartridge pilot-operated  check valve. The cartridge is the same as a standard check valve, but with a  different cover. The cutaway shows the works of the cartridge pilot-operated  check valve cover. On the left of the cover, a pilot piston pushes a simple ball  check from the left seat to the right seat. The ball check stays to the left --  its normal position -- held by a light spring. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="490"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-14. Slip-in cartridge pilot-operated check valve  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig414gif_00000050291.gif" width="490" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;If oil tries to pass from the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port, the same  pressure that is trying to open the check on the half area also is applied to  the pilot area, keeping the poppet closed. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Flow from the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port requires a pilot pressure  equal to at least 30% of pressure at the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port to shift the pilot  piston. When there is sufficient pressure on the pilot piston, it will move the  ball check off the left seat, opening a path to the drain. At the same time,  closed flow at the right seat blocks flow from the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port. With little or  no pressure at the pilot area, the 1:2 poppet opens, allowing flow from the  &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port. If pilot pressure drops while oil is reverse  flowing, the poppet shuts due to pressure on the pilot area like any check  valve. Various sizes of dampening control orifices control shifting speed of the  poppet to help reduce system shock. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge directional control valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The symbol and cutaway in Figure 4-15 are for a simple 2-way cartridge valve.  Most cartridge directional valves have a 1:2 pilot ratio, although a 1:1.1 ratio  works better in certain circuits. In either case, pilot pressure equal to the  working pressure at port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; and/or port &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; closes the poppet. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="472"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-15. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with plain  cover &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig415gif_00000050292.gif" width="472" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;From the cutaway view in Figure 4-15, it is plain to see that fluid pressure  at port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; will push the poppet off its seat and allow flow to port  &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt;. Although it is less obvious, fluid pressure at port &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; will also  open the poppet and allow flow to port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;. To stop flow in either  direction, apply pilot pressure to the pilot area opposite port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;. If any  pilot pressure generates a closing force equal to the opening force at the  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; and/or the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; ports, the spring bias closes the poppet. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Although slip-in cartridge directional valves appear to be normally closed,  they open easily without pilot pressure. A vertically mounted cylinder  controlled by slip-in cartridge valves can free-fall when the pump stops and  pilot pressure drops. This problem is easy to fix, as will be shown in some  later circuits. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway view in Figure 4-15 shows a plain cover with a pilot passage and  a control orifice. (Pilot pressure in this type of valve would come from another  solenoid valve or control valve in the circuit.) Control orifices come in a  variety of sizes to provide smooth, non-shock movement of the poppet. To control  shock even more, add a skirt with V notches to the poppet. Figure 4-23 shows the  symbol and cutaway for a cartridge poppet with a V-notched skirt for flow  control or dampening function. Different manufacturers have other ways to  achieve this dampening effect. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="262"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-16. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with  single-solenoid operator &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig416gif_00000050293.gif" width="262" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-16 shows the symbol for a 1:2 slip-in cartridge with an interface  for a solenoid-operated directional valve on the cover. This solenoid valve  directly operates the cartridge beneath it. It also can pilot other cartridge  valves through drilled passages in the manifold. The single solenoid pilot valve  can keep the poppet normally closed or normally open. Figure 4-16 shows a  normally closed configuration. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-17 shows a double-solenoid, detented pilot operator. The cartridge  poppet stays in its last position even with both solenoids de-energized. With  this type of solenoid operator there is no need to maintain current on the  solenoid after the valve shifts. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="242"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-17. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with  double-solenoid. detented operator &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig417gif_00000050294.gif" width="242" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-18 shows a double-solenoid, spring-centered pilot operator. The  center condition of the pilot operator allows the cartridges it pilots to open  when both solenoids are de-energized. This could allow a cylinder to relax in  case of power failure or when activating the emergency stop. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="272"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-18. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with double  solenoid operator N.O. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig418gif_00000050295.gif" width="272" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Conversely, Figure 4-19 has a double-solenoid pilot operator that closes all  cartridges when both solenoids are de-energized. The actuator would stop  suddenly and be locked in place. This type of pilot operator could cause system  shock without some means of decelerating the cylinder. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="261"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-19. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with double  solenoid operator N.C. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig419gif_00000050296.gif" width="261" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Slip-in cartridge valves with 1:2 area ratios appear to be normally closed  because of the spring inside the poppet. However, one half the pilot area is  connected to port &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; or port &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt;, and pressure at these ports can  open the poppet. The only way to keep a slip-in cartridge valve closed is to  keep pilot pressure on the pilot area at all times. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Anytime the pump is running, there should be enough pilot pressure to keep a  poppet closed. However, when the pump stops or pilot pressure drops for any  reason, the poppet may open, allowing an actuator to move. This might cause a  safety hazard or machine damage. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The symbol and cutaway in Figure 4-20 are for a cover with an integral  shuttle valve. A shuttle valve will take signals from two sources and send the  higher pressure signal to the pilot area. At the same time, the shuttle valve  will not let either signal pass through to the other signal passage. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="490"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-20. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with  shuttle-valve cover &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig420gif_00000050297.gif" width="490" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway of the shuttle operator shows that a pilot signal to pilot  passage &lt;i&gt;1&lt;/i&gt; or pilot passage &lt;i&gt;2&lt;/i&gt; goes to the pilot area, but not out  the line with little or no pilot signal. This happens because the shuttle poppet  closes the inactive or low-pressure opening and only allows pilot oil from the  active or higher-pressure side to flow to the pilot area. Because the area of  the shuttle ball is equal to that of both pilot passage ports, the strongest  signal always goes to the pilot area. In most applications, this is an important  feature. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The vertically mounted, rod-down cylinder shown in Figure 4-21 is holding a  heavy weight. This is an example of an over-running load. With standard  externally piloted slip-in cartridges, the weight will fall when the pump stops  or anytime pilot pressure drops below approximately 275 psi. This is because the  23,000-lb weight, acting on the 40.06 square inches of rod end area, produces a  static pressure of 574 psi (23,000/40.06 = 574 psi). This 574 psi would act  against half the area of the poppets to push them open. It takes approximately  275 psi on the pilot area plus the spring force to hold the poppets shut. For  safety’s sake, change this circuit to one with shuttle-valve covers. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="490"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-21. Plain-cover, solenoid-operated and plain-cover,  remotely piloted slip-in cartridge directional valves -- dropping a load when  the pump is off &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig421gif_00000050298.gif" width="490" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figure 4-22 is the same as above except for a shuttle valve in  the cover. One pilot supply is from the pump, while the second pilot supply is  from the cylinder’s rod end. While the pump is on and the system is at pressure,  pilot supply is from the pump. In case of low or no system pressure, pilot oil  comes from the cylinder’s rod end. With the cylinder’s rod end as the pilot  source, pressure that is trying to open the poppets on the half area of port  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; also acts on the pilot areas. Because the pilot areas are twice the  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port area, the poppets stay closed. The shuttle valve cover assures  there is always pilot pressure on the pilot area when the cylinder is not fully  extended. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="490"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-22. Shuttle-cover, solenoid-operated and  plain-cover, remotely piloted slip-in cartridge directional valves -- holding a  load when the pump is off &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77850Fig422gif_00000050299.gif" width="490" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge directional valves (continued) &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The symbol and cutaway for a slip-in cartridge valve in Figure 4-22 include a  stroke-adjusting screw that limits poppet travel. Restricting flow by limiting  poppet movement controls the actuator’s maximum speed. The filled triangle in  the poppet symbol shows the skirted or modified poppet that allows smooth flow  change as it shifts. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway in Figure 4-23 shows one design of a slip-in cartridge with a  stroke limiter. The cartridge function is identical to any 1:2-ratio poppet  except for the limited movement. Restricting the poppet movement makes the  cartridge function as a flow control as well as a directional valve. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="479"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-23. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with plain  cover, stroke limiter, and dampening function &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig423gif_00000050300.gif" width="479" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-24 shows the symbol for an adjustable-stroke cartridge valve with a  directional control valve cover. This particular valve only comes in a  single-solenoid configuration as shown. Also, it cannot pilot other cartridge  valves in the manifold. (Figures 4-27 and 4-28 show an adjustable  stroke-cartridge in a circuit. These examples also show a problem that can occur  when using a stroke limiter as a flow control in a meter-out circuit.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="248"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-24. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with  single-solenoid operator (N.C.) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig424gif_00000050301.gif" width="248" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-25 shows the symbol and cutaway for an internal-poppet, orifice-type  cartridge valve. The internal poppet orifice supplies pilot oil from the  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port only. Standard orifices that meet most needs are available. The  internal pilot supply cartridge valve provides a check-valve function without  drilling pilot passages in the manifold. As a check valve, it always allows free  flow from the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port and blocks flow from the  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="461"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-25. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with orifice  port in poppet for pilot supply &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig425gif_00000050302.gif" width="461" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The 2-way cartridge shut-off valve in Figure 4-26 is for high flow systems.  This 2-way shut-off might allow pump flow to a circuit as shown in the  schematic. Also use a 2-way shut-off to let fluid flow from a large cylinder to  tank for rapid advance. Using a normally open solenoid valve in place of the  normally closed one shown allows flow through the cartridge valve until the  solenoid is energized.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="228"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-26. Slip-in cartridge directional valve with NC  orifice port in poppet for pilot supply &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig426gif_00000050303.gif" width="228" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;One advantage of the internal-pilot-supply-type cartridge valve is that it is  not necessary to keep the pump running to have pilot pressure. This can  eliminate a shuttle valve when an over-running load tries to move the cylinder.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The internally piloted slip-in cartridge always controls flow from the  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port to the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port. Fluid is free to flow from the &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; port  to the A port because pilot supply comes only from the &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When using a stroke-adjusted poppet to meter-out flow from a cylinder with an  oversize piston rod, look out for the problem that appears in Figure 4-27. This  circuit pictures a horizontal cylinder with a 2:1 rod that needs a meter-out  flow control. This is good circuit design for spool-type valves, but when using  an adjustable-stroke slip-in cartridge valve, it can cause trouble. This circuit  can actually increase the cylinder speed when making an adjustment to slow it.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="490"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-27. Slip-in cartridge valves with adjustable-stroke  poppet at CV1 (extending with poppet on CV1 full open) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig427gif_00000050304.gif" width="490" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figure 4-27 shows the valves shifted to extend the cylinder.  Flow from the pump is passing through &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt; to the cylinder’s cap end. Oil  from the cylinder’s rod end is flowing to tank freely through &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; because  the stroke adjuster is fully open. Pressure gauge &lt;i&gt;PG1&lt;/i&gt; shows a system  pressure of 700 psi. Gauge &lt;i&gt;PG2&lt;/i&gt; in the cylinder’s cap line reads 700 psi,  and &lt;i&gt;PG3&lt;/i&gt; at the cylinder’s rod line reads 0 psi. The 700-psi reading is  from the load’s resistance (the cylinder is moving with no flow restriction).  Pilot pressure is always the same as system pressure. Flow to the cylinder’s cap  end is 50 gpm and flow from the rod end to tank is 25 gpm. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;With the stroke limiter screwed in to restrict tank flow to 12.5 gpm, the  conditions shown in Figure 4-28 will prevail. In a normal meter-out circuit with  a flow control and a spool-type directional valve, the cylinder speed slows and  system pressure increases. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="474"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-28. Slip-in cartridge valves with adjustable stroke  poppet at CV1 (extending with poppet on CV1 set at 12.5 gpm) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig428gif_00000050305.gif" width="474" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;With a cartridge-valve circuit, however, restricting flow from the cylinder’s  rod end increases system pressure. Gauges &lt;i&gt;PG1&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;PG2&lt;/i&gt; register  approximately 1600 psi -- or a little more than twice the non-restricted flow  pressure. This is because the load now is being moved by pressure on half the  piston area in a regeneration circuit. Gauge &lt;i&gt;PG3&lt;/i&gt;, at the cylinder’s rod  end, climbs to approximately 1800 psi due to area-ratio intensification. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This intensified pressure acts on the half &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; port area at &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt;,  while half the B port area sees system pressure. Pilot pressure on the full  pilot area of &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; is 1600 psi, plus a spring force of, say, 75 psi. If  the full pilot area is one square inch, the poppet has a closing force of 1675  lb. The 800-lb opening force on the poppet is generated by 1600 psi on half the  area. The opening force on the other half area of the poppet is 900 pounds (1800  psi X 1/2 sq. in.), making the total opening force 1700 lb. With 1700-lb opening  force and 1675-lb closing force, the poppet opens to allow rod-end oil to  regenerate to the cap end. Instead of the cylinder slowing to half speed, it  moves 150% faster due to regeneration. The more the flow from &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; to tank  decreases, the faster the cylinder extends. Note that restricting flow at  &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt; as a meter-in flow-control circuit would allow infinite control of  cylinder speed. Another option would be to use a shuttle cover and take pilot  pressure from the pump or the cylinder’s rod end. As pressure intensified at the  rod end, pilot pressure to &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; would increase also. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge directional valves compared to spool-type 4-way  directional valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-29 pictures a circuit with a 300-gpm pump powering a large-bore, 2:1  rod-diameter cylinder. This is the type of circuit that uses an important  feature of slip-in cartridge valves. Flow from the rod end is only 150 gpm as  the cylinder extends, but while retracting, flow from the cap end is 600 gpm. A  conventional 4-way valve to operate the cylinder in Figure 4-32 must be capable  of 600-gpm flow. A 4-way valve with this capacity is large and expensive. Its  delivery may involve a long lead time. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="358"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-29. Slip-in cartridge valves for high-flow circuits  (at rest, pump running) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig429gif_00000050306.gif" width="358" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Four slip-in cartridge valves can duplicate the function of the 600 gpm 4-way  valve. This may sound expensive and inefficient, but with a circuit such as the  one in Figure 4-29, it actually is more efficient, less expensive, and saves  space. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="359"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-30. Slip-in cartridge valves for high-flow circuits  (cylinder extending) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig430gif_00000050307.gif" width="359" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cylinder is extending in Figure 4-30, with 300 gpm going to the cap end  through &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt;. Simultaneously, the rod end of the cylinder is discharging  150 gpm to tank through &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt;. With this difference in flow, it costs less  and saves space to use cartridges of different sizes. Size the cartridges for  nominal pressure drop at their maximum flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="351"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-31. Slip-in cartridge valves for high-flow circuits  (cylinder retracting) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig431gif_00000050308.gif" width="351" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cylinder is retracting in Figure 4-31. Flow to the rod end is 300 gpm  while flow from the cap end is 600 gpm. For this higher cap-end flow, use a  larger cartridge to minimize backpressure. This circuit will have three  different-sized cartridges to carry the flow required during each phase of the  cycle. Size &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; for 150 gpm, &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt; for 600 gpm, and &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; and  &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt; for 300 gpm. When using a regeneration circuit, size &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt; for  600-gpm flow also. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The small amount of space taken by the cartridges, plus the lower cost and  better availability of the parts make this system superior to one with a  spool-type 4-way valve for high flows. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another advantage of slip-in-type cartridge valves is their short response  time. Cartridge poppets do not have land overlaps like spool valves have.  Without land overlap there is flow when pilot pressure drops. Also, when the  poppet opens, it only moves far enough to allow system flow to pass. When  applying pilot pressure again, the poppet closes quickly without the extra  travel often seen in spool valves. A spool valve, without stroke limiters,  shifts full stroke. This full shifting may be far enough to pass several times  the flow required. Then, when the spool starts returning to center, there is  extra spool travel just to get back to controlling flow. This does not sound  like much but faster response of cartridge valves can shorten cycle time and  increase production. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="310"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-32. Conventional 4-way directional valve for  high-flow circuit (at rest, pump running) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig432gif_00000050309.gif" width="310" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figures 4-29 to 4-32 uses only one pilot control valve. This  limits the versatility of the slip-in cartridges. Multiple pilot control valves,  shown in the following circuits, make the use of cartridge valves even more  attractive. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge directional valves on running-away loads&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 4-33 to 4-36 show a vertically mounted (rod down) cylinder holding a  heavy platen and tooling. This cylinder will run away if oil discharges to tank  uncontrolled. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="290"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-33. Slip-in cartridge valve circuit for running-away  load (at rest, pump running) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig433gif_00000050310.gif" width="290" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A pressure-control cover (that makes &lt;i&gt;CV6&lt;/i&gt; a counterbalance valve)  prevents rapid flow to tank. Cartridges &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; through &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt; control  cylinder flow and direction, and solenoid-operated directional valves shift  their positions. Cartridge check valve &lt;i&gt;CV5&lt;/i&gt; bypasses normally closed  counterbalance valve &lt;i&gt;CV6&lt;/i&gt; to retract the cylinder. With all solenoids  deenergized, the pump unloads to tank through cartridge valves &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt; and  &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt;. Counterbalance valve &lt;i&gt;CV6&lt;/i&gt; keeps the load from falling at this  time. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="289"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-34. Slip-in cartridge valve circuit for running-away  load (cylinder extending, regeneration) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig434gif_00000050311.gif" width="289" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-34 shows valve positions and likely pressures as the cylinder is  regenerating forward. Energizing solenoids &lt;i&gt;A1&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; closes  &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt; and opens &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt;, porting pump flow to the cylinder. This action  also opens &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; to allow cylinder’s rod end flow to go through &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt;,  combine with pump flow, and regenerate the cylinder forward. Counterbalance  valve &lt;i&gt;CV6&lt;/i&gt; keeps the forward motion of the cylinder from going faster than  the pump and regeneration volume as indicated by the 750 psi seen on gauge  &lt;i&gt;PG3&lt;/i&gt;. The cylinder is extending rapidly at low or no force. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="292"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-35. Slip-in cartridge valve circuit for running-away  load (cylinder extending at full tonnage) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig435gif_00000050312.gif" width="292" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the cylinder extends, it makes a limit switch to deenergize solenoid  &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt;. When solenoid &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; drops out, Figure 4-35, pilot pressure closes  &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt;, while &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; opens to tank. The cylinder slows to about half the  regeneration speed, but is now able to generate full force. Counterbalance  &lt;i&gt;CV6&lt;/i&gt; still keeps the cylinder from free-falling as it approaches the work.  When the cylinder starts to form a part, pressure increases to whatever it takes  to do the work. The cylinder continues extending until it finishes the work  stroke. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="286"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-36. Slip-in cartridge valve circuit for running-away  load (cylinder retracting) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig436gif_00000050313.gif" width="286" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To retract the cylinder, the valve conditions shown in Figure 4-36 prevail.  Energizing solenoids &lt;i&gt;B1&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; allows &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt; to  open, and closes &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt;. Pump flow now goes to the cylinder’s  rod end through cartridge check valve &lt;i&gt;CV5&lt;/i&gt;. That bypasses normally closed  counterbalance valve &lt;i&gt;CV6&lt;/i&gt;. Oil from the cylinder’s cap end goes to tank  through cartridge valve &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Anytime all solenoids are deenergized, the cylinder stops and holds position.  Counterbalance valve &lt;i&gt;CV6&lt;/i&gt; holds the cylinder in place as long as its  pressure setting is greater than the load-induced pressure in the cylinder’s rod  end. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When sizing the counterbalance valve, be sure to consider the cylinder’s  static pressure. Slip-in cartridge valves have high flow capacity at nominal  pressure drops. When available pressure drop is high, flow can increase to a  point that the counterbalance valve’s response is too slow to stop the cylinder  quickly. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Slip-in cartridge directional valves with prefill valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 4-37 to 4-40 shows cartridge valves controlling a 50-in. cylinder  with a 48.75-in. piston rod. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In Figure 4-37 the circuit is at rest with all solenoid valves deenergized.  The cylinder maintains its position because load-induced pressure on the  &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; pilot areas holds them closed. Pilot pressure reaches  the pilot valves through &lt;i&gt;CK1&lt;/i&gt;, while &lt;i&gt;CK2&lt;/i&gt; blocks flow to tank. When  system pressure is higher than pressure in the cylinder’s rod end, &lt;i&gt;CK2&lt;/i&gt;  lets this higher pressure into the pilot circuit. The pump unloads to tank  through &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="289"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-37. Slip-in cartridge valve for vertically mounted  cylinder with prefill valve (at rest, pump running) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig437gif_00000050314.gif" width="289" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The size of &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; is important, because controlling flow through it sets  the cylinder free-fall speed. Size the valve for the pressure drop generated by  load-induced pressure. A stroke limiter in &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; actually sets maximum  cylinder extension speed. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Energizing solenoid &lt;i&gt;A1&lt;/i&gt; shifts &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt; closed to block tank flow and  leaves &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt; open to send pump flow to the cylinder’s cap end. Figure 4-38  shows the cylinder in a controlled free fall. Energizing solenoid &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; lets  &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; open, while holding &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; closed. Oil from the cylinder’s rod  end now has a path to tank through &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt;.  &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A prefill valve lets oil from the tank into the cylinder’s cap end. The  cylinder will advance as fast as the stroke limiter on &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; allows.  Free-fall speed can be in excess of 15 in./sec. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="284"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-38. Slip-in cartridge valve for vertically mounted  cylinder with prefill valve (cylinder extending, controlled fall) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig438gif_00000050315.gif" width="284" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the cylinder extends in free fall, it contacts a limit switch that  de-energizes solenoid &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt;, Figure 4-39. &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt; remains closed and  &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; tries to close. As &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; is closing, backpressure on the  cylinder’s rod end will build to 900 psi and the pressure control will keep  &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; from fully closing. Because &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; is restricting flow at 900  psi, the cylinder decelerates and tries to stop. While the cylinder is slowing,  decreased vacuum in the cap end lets the pre-fill valve close. After the prefill  closes, pump flow forces the cylinder to keep moving and rod-end pressure keeps  the pressure control on &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; open. Deceleration is smooth and rapid. The  cylinder continues extending toward the work at the slower pump rate. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="288"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-39. Slip-in cartridge valve for vertically mounted  cylinder with prefill valve (cylinder approaching work, decelerating) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig439gif_00000050316.gif" width="288" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 4-40 shows the cylinder at work. Solenoid &lt;i&gt;A1&lt;/i&gt; is still energized  and solenoid &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; has been energized again. (Solenoid &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; could be  reenergized by a limit switch or by a pressure switch when the cylinder contacts  the work.) Energizing solenoid &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; lets &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; open fully, taking away  the 900-psi backpressure that decreases tonnage. The cylinder extends at the  force required to do the work (up to relief pressure setting). &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" cellpadding="0" width="283"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Figure 4-40. Slip-in cartridge valve for vertically mounted  cylinder with prefill valve (cylinder pressing) &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/77852Fig440gif_00000050317.gif" width="283" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To retract the cylinder, energize solenoids &lt;i&gt;A2&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;B1&lt;/i&gt;. Solenoid  &lt;i&gt;B2&lt;/i&gt; closes &lt;i&gt;CV3&lt;/i&gt;, pilots the pre-fill valve open, and opens  &lt;i&gt;CV4&lt;/i&gt; to tank. Solenoid &lt;i&gt;A2&lt;/i&gt; closes &lt;i&gt;CV1&lt;/i&gt; and opens &lt;i&gt;CV2&lt;/i&gt;,  sending pump flow to the cylinder’s rod end. The cylinder retracts rapidly with  most of the cap-end flow going to tank through the pre-fill valve. In case of  power failure or emergency stop, the cylinder stays where it is, or if it is  moving, it decelerates, stops, and holds its position.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pressure-control valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Several types of pressure-control valves are found in fluid power circuits.  Some keep the whole system from excess pressure while others only protect a  portion of the system. Others allow flow to an isolated circuit after reaching a  preset pressure. Some bypass fluid at low or no pressure when activated.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;This chapter only covers relief valves and unloading valves because they are  closely associated with hydraulic pumps. The other pressure-control valves are  part of the control circuit and will be dealt with after directional control  valves.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Why relief valves?&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;All fixed-volume pump circuits require a relief valve to protect the system  from excess pressure. Fixed-volume pumps must move fluid when they turn. When a  pump is unloading through an open-center circuit or actuators are in motion,  fluid movement is not a problem. It is when the actuators stall with the  directional valve still shifted that a relief valve is essential.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pressure compensated pump circuits could run successfully without relief  valves because they only move fluid when pressure drops below their compensator  setting. (Most designers still use a relief valve in these circuits for reasons  explained later.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In either case, a relief valve is similar to a fuse in an electrical system.  When circuit amperage stays below the fuse amperage, all is well. When circuit  amperage tries to exceed fuse amperage, the fuse blows and disables the circuit.  Both devices protect the system from excess pressure by keeping it below a  preset level.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The difference is that when an electrical fuse blows it must be reset or  replaced by maintenance personnel before the machine can cycle again. This  requirement alerts the electricians to a possible problem and usually causes  them to look for the reason before restarting the machine. Without the  protection of a fuse, the electrical circuit would finally overheat and start a  fire.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In a hydraulic circuit, a relief valve opens and bypasses fluid when pressure  exceeds its setting. The valve then closes again when pressure falls. This means  a relief valve can bypass fluid anytime . . . or all the time . . . without  intervention by maintenance. (It also means the system can run hot even with a  heat exchanger installed.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many fixed-volume pump circuits depend on this bypassing capability during  the cycle, and some even bypass fluid during idle time. A well-designed circuit  never bypasses fluid unless there is a malfunction, such as a limit switch not  closing or an operator overriding the controls. This eliminates most overheating  problems and saves energy.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Relief valve operation &lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;There are two different designs of relief valves in use: &lt;i&gt;direct acting&lt;/i&gt;  and &lt;i&gt;pilot operated&lt;/i&gt;. Both types have advantages and work better in certain  applications.&lt;br /&gt;Some terms relating to relief valves and their function are:  &lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Overshoot&lt;/i&gt;: The actual pressure reading when a relief valve first  opens to bypass fluid. (It can be up to twice the actual pressure setting.)  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Hysteresis&lt;/i&gt;: The difference in pressure between when a relief valve  starts letting some flow pass (cracking pressure) and when full flow is passing.   &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Stability&lt;/i&gt;: The fluctuation of pressure as a relief valve is bypassing  at set pressure.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Reseat pressure&lt;/i&gt;: The pressure at which a relief valve closes after it  has been bypassing.  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Pressure override&lt;/i&gt;: The difference in the pressure reading from the  time a relief valve first opens (cracking pressure) until it is passing all pump  flow to tank.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Direct-acting relief valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 9-1&lt;/b&gt; shows a cutaway view and the symbol for a direct-acting  relief valve. The valve has a poppet that is pressed against its seat by an  adjustable spring. An adjusting knob can be change the force on the spring to  raise or lower maximum pressure. The poppet remains seated while pump flow goes  to the circuit and pressure is lower than the relief valve setting. If pressure  tries to go above spring setting, the poppet is forced off the seat just enough  to pass excess pump flow to tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-1. Cutaway drawing and symbol for direct-acting relief  valve. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig91jpg_00000020383.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The symbol shows a single box with a flow arrow offset from the inlet &lt;i&gt;P  &lt;/i&gt;and outlet &lt;i&gt;T&lt;/i&gt; flow lines. The dashed pilot line from the inlet line to  the bottom of the box indicates inlet pressure can push against the flow arrow.  On the opposite side of the box is a spring with a sloping arrow through it to  show an opposing force on the flow arrow. When pressure at port &lt;i&gt;P&lt;/i&gt; builds  enough to overcome spring pressure, it forces the flow arrow up until there is a  path from &lt;i&gt;P&lt;/i&gt; to &lt;i&gt;T&lt;/i&gt;. Although there is no pilot passage in the actual  valve, the function is implied and thus is part of the symbol. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The main advantage of direct-acting relief valves over pilot operated relief  valves is that they respond very rapidly to pressure buildup. Any relief valve  does not know there is a problem until pressure is very near or at its setting.  Then it must open to relieve excess flow as quickly as possible to keep pressure  overshoot low. Because there is only one moving part in a direct-acting relief  valve, it can open rapidly, thus minimizing pressure spikes. &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-2&lt;/b&gt;  shows typical performance graphs from direct-acting and pilot-operated relief  valves. Notice the difference in response time and pressure spikes as the valves  open to send excess flow to tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-2. Typical performance plots for direct-acting and  pilot-operated relief valves &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig92jpg_00000020384.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The main disadvantage of direct-acting relief valves is that they open  partially at about 150 psi below set pressure. Because the poppet is in direct  contact with the spring that sets maximum pressure, when the poppet opens it  forces the spring back and increases pressure. The amount depends on the  spring’s length and stiffness. The plot in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-3&lt;/b&gt; shows the  flow/pressure relationship of a typical direct-acting relief valve. With a  direct-acting relief valve setting of 1500 psi at 10 gpm, it is very possible  that some fluid will start to pass when pressure is as low as 1350 to 1400 psi.  Continued pressure increase allows more flow until all pump flow goes to tank at  1500 psi. If work is still being performed at 1450 psi, it will be at a reduced  speed because some flow is going to tank. When this valve is set at 1500-psi  cracking pressure, no flow will bypass until pressure reaches that level, but  final pressure would be as high as 1650 psi. (Pilot-operated relief valves . . .  discussed next . . . do not start to open until pressure is within 25 to 50 psi  of their settings.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-3. Plot of flow-pressure relationship of a typical  direct acting relief valve. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig93jpg_00000020385.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Direct-acting relief valves often are quite noisy due to the high velocity of  the fluid bypass and the instability inherent in their design.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Direct-acting relief valves are not normally used on industrial hydraulic  systems, except for those with flows under 3 gpm, and as pilot control devices.  Most industrial designs use long springs that gain little force per compression  increment to keep pressure override low.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When a direct-acting relief valve is specified as &lt;i&gt;preset,  non-adjustable&lt;/i&gt;, always specify whether the valve is to be set for cracking  pressure or full flow. If full flow is desired, a flow must be specified  also.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pilot-operated relief valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 9-4&lt;/b&gt; shows cutaway views of two common types of pilot-operated  relief valves. There are many variations of these designs but the function and  symbol are the same. The pilot section on each valve is a low-flow direct-acting  relief valve that sets maximum system pressure. Because the valve is small and  passes very little flow, it has less than 50-psi pressure override as it  operates.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-4. Cutaway view and symbol for two common types of  pilot-operated relief valves. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig94jpg_00000020386.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The control orifice in the balanced piston or poppet usually has a diameter  around 0.040 in. This size gives good relief-flow stability and is not prone to  becoming blocked with contamination. If the orifice is plugged, the balanced  piston or poppet will open at approximately 20 psi and dump all pump flow to  tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A flow path from the outlet of the control orifice . . . on top of the  balanced piston or poppet . . . leads up to the pilot section, which contains a  spring-loaded poppet. Adjusting the tension on the spring-loaded poppet sets the  pressure in the circuit. Fluid used by the pilot section returns to tank through  the tank port. The balanced-piston type has a hole through it that lets control  fluid flow to tank. The vent port in the pilot section is normally plugged.  (Removing the plug allows this valve to perform other functions.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Many inline-mounted valves have two inlet ports as a piping convenience. Pump  flow comes in one inlet and exits through the opposite one. This eliminates the  need for a tee in the pump line plumbing.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;How a pilot-operated relief valve works&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pump flow enters the inlet port and flows to the circuit and through the  control orifice to the top side of the balanced piston or poppet. It also  travels up to the pilot section’s spring-loaded poppet, where it is blocked.  When pressure is too low to unseat the spring-loaded poppet, pressure is the  same on either side of the balanced piston or poppet. Because hydraulic forces  are equal on both sides of the balanced piston or poppet, the light spring holds  them in their normally closed position. This condition continues until pressure  reaches approximately 25 to 50 psi below the pressure set at the relief valve  pressure-adjusting knob.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;For example, if pressure was set at 1000 psi, at around 950 psi the  spring-loaded poppet in the pilot section will crack open and allow a small  amount of fluid to pass to tank. At this point the amount of fluid passing the  spring-loaded poppet can easily flow through the control orifice so pump flow to  tank is blocked. As pressure continues to increase, it finally forces the  spring-loaded poppet in the pilot section to open far enough so that flow  through it is greater than flow through the control orifice. When flow through  the spring-loaded poppet is more than flow through the control orifice, pressure  on top of the balanced piston or poppet decreases. When the pressure imbalance  is great enough, the balanced piston or poppet moves toward the decreased  pressure and opens a flow path to tank. Flow to tank is just enough to bypass  any excess fluid the system is not using. As a relief function, this valve never  opens more than enough to bypass excess flow.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When system pressure decreases, the spring-loaded poppet in the pilot section  reseats. Fluid trapped on top of the balanced piston or poppet forces it to  close and block pump flow to tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A pilot-operated relief valve allows all pump flow to go to the actuators  almost to its final setting. This means the valve can operate at a lower maximum  pressure and it will not slow actuator speed when forces increase.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Remote pilot operation&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another capability of pilot-operated relief valves is that they can be  operated remotely. &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-5&lt;/b&gt; shows the vent port connected to a  direct-acting relief valve at a remote location for easy pressure adjustment.  Because a relief valve is normally mounted at or very near the pump outlet, it  can be difficult to reach. When it is necessary to change pressures on a regular  basis, the setup in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-5&lt;/b&gt; works well. The vent port of the  pilot-operated relief valve is connected to a direct-acting relief valve at a  distance of 15 ft maximum. The pilot-operated relief valve is set for maximum  pressure and the remote adjustment can set at any pressure lower than this  maximum.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-5. Pilot-operated relief valve connected for remote  control. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig95jpg_00000020387.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Using a 4-way directional control valve and three remote adjustments could  allow electrical selection of three different pressures. Using more directional  controls and more remote adjustments could give multiple pressure selections  electrically.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Solenoid-operated relief valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 9-6&lt;/b&gt; shows how a directional control valve attached to the pilot  section and piped to the vent port and tank can bypass or block flow from the  control orifice. Bypassing the control-orifice fluid allows pump flow to unload  to tank at about 20 psi. Blocking control-orifice flow forces fluid to the  circuit at pressures up to relief valve setting. This is one way to keep a  fixed-volume pump from overheating the fluid when it is not performing work.  (See &lt;b&gt;Chapter 8, Figure 8-11&lt;/b&gt; for a circuit that uses a normally open  solenoid-operated relief valve to unload a fixed-volume pump in a multiple  cylinder circuit.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-6. Normally open solenoid-operated relief valve.  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig96jpg_00000020388.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Solenoid-operated relief valves can be purchased in normally open mode (as  shown), normally closed mode, and double-solenoid dual- or tri-pressure setups.  (See &lt;b&gt;Chapter 4&lt;/b&gt; for symbols.) A solenoid-operated relief valve also can be  used as a 2-way normally open or normally closed directional valve in high-flow  circuits.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Proportional-solenoid relief valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The relief valves in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-7&lt;/b&gt; are electronically adjusted by using a  proportional solenoid instead of an adjusting knob. A proportional solenoid  produces increased force with increased voltage. These solenoids usually operate  at 0 to.10 V on DC current. They can produce infinitely variable force. The  direct-acting type is for low (below 3 gpm) flow. It also can serve in the pilot  section of high-flow pilot-operated valves. Operation of a proportional relief  valve is the same as for manually controlled valves. The difference is how the  force on the control poppet is generated.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-7. Relief valves operated by proportional solenoid.  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig97jpg_00000020389.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Unloading valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Unloading valves are pressure-control devices that are used to dump excess  fluid to tank at little or no pressure. A common application is in hi-lo pump  circuits where two pumps move an actuator at high speed and low pressure, the  circuit then shifts to a single pump providing high pressure to perform  work.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another application is sending excess flow from the cap end of an  oversize-rod cylinder to tank as the cylinder retracts. This makes it possible  to use a smaller, less-expensive directional control valve, while keeping  pressure drop low.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Direct-acting unloading valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-8&lt;/b&gt; shows the construction of a  direct-acting unloading valve. The valve consists of a spool held in the closed  position by a spring. The spool blocks flow from the inlet to the tank port  under normal conditions. When high-pressure fluid from the pump enters at the  external-pilot port, it exerts force against the pilot piston. (The  small-diameter pilot piston allows the use of a long, low-force spring.) When  system pressure increases to the spring setting, fluid bypasses to tank (as a  relief valve would function). When pressure goes above the spring setting, the  spool opens fully to dump excess fluid to tank at little or no pressure. (The  example circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-10&lt;/b&gt; illustrates this function.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-8. Direct-acting unloading valve &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig98jpg_00000020390.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pilot-operated unloading valve&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cutaway view in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-9&lt;/b&gt; shows a pilot-operated unloading valve.  A pilot-operated unloading valve has less pressure override than its  direct-acting counterpart, so it will not dump part of the flow prematurely. It  also will go from no flow to maximum flow quickly, thus using all the flow from  the high-volume pump flow for a longer period, and rapidly dropping horsepower  draw from the high-volume pump.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-9. Pilot-operated unloading valve. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig99jpg_00000020391.jpg" width="250" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;(This valve design is also used as an unloading relief valve in accumulator  circuits. &lt;b&gt;Chapter 16&lt;/b&gt; on Accumulators will have a circuit using this  valve.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A pilot-operated unloading relief valve is the same as a pilot-operated  relief valve with the addition of an unloading spool. Without the unloading  spool, this valve would function just like any pilot-operated relief valve.  Pressure buildup in the pilot section would open some flow to tank and unbalance  the poppet, allowing it to open and relieve excess pump flow.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In a pilot-operated unloading valve, the unloading spool receives a signal  through the remote-pilot port when pressure in the working circuit goes above  its setting. At the same time, pressure on the spring-loaded ball in the pilot  section starts to open it. Pressure drop on the front side of the unloading  spool lowers back force and pilot pressure from the high-pressure circuit forces  the spring-loaded ball completely off its seat. Now there is more flow going to  tank than the control orifice can keep up with. The main poppet opens at  approximately 20 psi. Now, all high-volume pump flow can go to tank at little or  no pressure drop and all horsepower can go to the low volume pump to do the  work. When pressure falls approximately 15% below the pressure set in the pilot  section, the spring-loaded ball closes and pushes the unloading spool back for  the next cycle.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;An unloading valve requires no electric signals. This eliminates the need for  extra persons when troubleshooting. These valves are very reliable and seldom  require maintenance, adjustment or replacement.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Hi-lo pump circuit&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Often a cylinder needs very little force to stroke to and from the work --  and only a short high-force stroke to perform the work. When this is the case,  the hi-lo circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-10&lt;/b&gt; works well and costs less.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="485"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-10. Typical hi-lo circuit using two pumps. &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig910jpg_00000020392.jpg" width="485" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;For example: if a single-pump circuit needs 60 gpm to make the required cycle  time and 3000 psi to perform the operation, the circuit would require a 110-hp  electric motor to drive it. (60 X 3000 X 0.000583 = 104 hp)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-10&lt;/b&gt; is a typical hi-lo pump circuit that  consumes less horsepower while maintaining fast cycle times. It uses a 25-hp  motor and supporting equipment for less expense up front, as well as during its  useful life. The motor drives a 50-gpm low-pressure pump and a 15-gpm  high-pressure pump -- for a total of 65 gpm. The extra flow is required to  maintain cycle time because the work stroke is slower. The tank, valves, and  line sizes are still rated for 65-gpm flow and 3000 psi, but the electric motor  and controls are much smaller.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;As shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-10&lt;/b&gt;, the hi-lo circuit also has a relief valve, an  unloading valve, and a check valve. The relief valve protects the  low-volume/high-pressure pump from pressure above 3000 psi. The unloading valve  is set at 500 psi to divert flow from the high-volume/low-pressure pump to tank  when system pressure climbs above this setting. A check valve after the  high-volume/low-pressure pump isolates system pressure from the unloading valve  circuit while performing work at maximum pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A 4-way, 3-position, solenoid pilot-operated, spring-centered, all-ports-open  directional control valve sends all pump flow to tank while the system is idle.  This power unit and valve arrangement send a double-acting cylinder through a  fast-approach, high-force work stroke and fast return – driven by a 25-hp  electric motor. The unloading valve cutaway view shows the pipe connections to  this in-line mounted valve.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Energizing solenoid &lt;i&gt;A1&lt;/i&gt; on the directional valve sends flow from both  pumps to the cap end of the double-acting cylinder. The cylinder advances  rapidly at low pressure until it contacts work. At this point, contact pressure  builds quickly and when it passes 500 psi, the unloading valve is forced open.  Now, all high-volume pump flow is diverted to tank at very low pressure (and  horsepower). Up to this point, the highest horsepower draw would be: (65  gpm)(500 psi)(0.000583) = 19 hp. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;With the high-volume pump unloaded, there is plenty of horsepower to raise  the high-pressure pump to the 3000-psi pressure required to do the work. The  work requires (15 gpm)(3000 psi)(0.000583) = 26 hp. This is well within the  capability of the 25-hp motor specified.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A hi-lo circuit makes it possible to replace a high-horsepower motor and its  control components with a much smaller less-expensive setup.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Other applications for relief valves&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Relief valves are used in circuits to protect components from excess pressure  due to heat or external forces where pressure buildup in a blocked flow circuit  could damage an actuator or be a safety hazard.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In hydraulic motor circuits, relief valves can eliminate shock when the motor  must be decelerated quickly. In this function, fluid is ported from the  high-pressure outlet port of the motor to the low-pressure inlet port, while  holding ample backpressure to stop the motor without damage.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="485"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig. 9-11. Symbols for modular relief valves. (Note that  these symbols do not show X and Y ports for solenoid pilot-operated valves.)  &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/44617Fig911jpg_00000020393.jpg" width="485" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most relief valve functions are available as modular or sandwich valves that  mount between the directional control valve and sub-plate. &lt;b&gt;Figure 9-11&lt;/b&gt;  shows most of the common configurations presently offered by fluid power  suppliers. These modules are usually available in all valve sizes up to D08 (3/4  in.) ports.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-5753191019865714994?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/5753191019865714994/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_49.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/5753191019865714994'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/5753191019865714994'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_49.html' title='الصمامات الهيدروليكيه'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-7887083158116064253</id><published>2009-07-08T09:13:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T09:17:38.980-07:00</updated><title type='text'>المكدسات الهيدروليكيه3</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Accumulators used for fast response and over-pressure control of  pressure-compensated pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Because most pressure-compensated pump circuits have closed-center or  two-position directional valves (such as the one shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-16&lt;/b&gt;),  they stay at full-pressure, no-flow until a valve shifts. After any directional  valve shifts to start an actuator’s movement, pressure in the circuit starts to  drop. When the pump sees a pressure drop, its internal mechanism starts shifting  as fast as possible to start fluid flowing. Pump shifting times vary, but no  matter how fast they shift, the actuator’s initial response will be slowed down.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="385"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-16 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig116gif_00000043829.gif" width="385" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;With an accumulator installed, as shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-17&lt;/b&gt;, the pump is  still at no-flow when the circuit is at rest. However, there is a ready supply  of oil at pressure available. As a cylinder starts to cycle, as seen in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-18&lt;/b&gt;, fluid flows directly to the actuator from the accumulator  and pressure starts to drop. This pressure drop causes the pump to go on stroke,  but now pressure drop is minimal. The cylinder takes off quickly and smoothly,  and the pump has time to respond to the flow need.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="353"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-17 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig117gif_00000043830.gif" width="353" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;On the other end of the cycle, if the pump is at full flow and all valves  center or all the actuators hit the end of stroke, the flow requirement suddenly  drops to zero. The pressure-compensated pump is still flowing at the maximum  rate and pressure starts to climb. The pump will continue at full flow until  pressure reaches 80-98% of the compensator setting. There has been zero flow  needed for some time, but the pump does not know this until pressure is near  maximum. When pressure reaches compensator setting, the pump starts to shift to  no flow. All pump flow during shifting time has no place to go, so this excess  flow generates a pressure spike of five to ten times the compensator setting.  This pressure spike can cause premature failure of the pump, plumbing, and  actuators.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="365"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-18 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig118gif_00000043831.gif" width="365" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A common fix for this pressure spike is to add a relief valve near the pump  outlet, set 150 to 200 psi higher than the pump compensator (as shown in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-16&lt;/b&gt;). This relief valve should reduce the pressure spike, but it  does not lower it as much as it appears. A relief valve remains closed until  pressure reaches 90 to 98% of its setting. Once the relief reaches maximum  pressure, it starts to open, but by the time it actually relieves, the pressure  may be 11/2 to 3 times its set pressure. This reduced spike is better, but still  is not as good as what an accumulator could provide.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Other problems can occur with relief valves. For example, if the relief valve  setting is at or near the pump-compensator setting, the pump can start  oscillating on-off flow. As the pump nears its pressure-compensator setting and  starts to compensate, the relief valve starts to relieve. A flow path is created  when the relief valve begins to open, so downstream pressure drops, causing the  pump to go back on stroke. The drop in pressure allows the relief valve to  close, so downstream pressure builds up again. This oscillation cycle repeats  rapidly, causing damage to the pump and possible line failure due to shock. In  another example, if the relief valve setting is lower than the pump compensator,  all pump flow goes to tank at relief pressure, generating excess heat. To avoid  these problems, use the correct procedure when setting pressures on a relief  valve used to reduce pressure spikes.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;An accumulator absorbs excess pump flow with minimal pressure override or  shock. While fluid from the pump compensates from full flow to no flow, as seen  in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-19&lt;/b&gt;, it has a direct path to the accumulator. Because the  accumulator has a compressible gas in it, it takes in the small amount of excess  flow produced while the compensator is reacting. Pressure increase from this  additional fluid is imperceptible.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="405"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-19 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig119gif_00000043832.gif" width="405" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To size an accumulator for fast response of the circuit, plan to have  somewhere between 1 and 5 sec of actuator flow before pressure drops below the  minimum it takes to move it. A rule of thumb is to have 1 gal of accumulator for  every 10 gpm of pump flow.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Using an accumulator as an emergency power supply&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;A conventional hydraulic system will not operate unless the pump is running.  Some machines must be able to cycle to a safe condition after a power or pump  failure. Use an accumulator to store enough energy to move the actuators to a  safe condition after the pump quits. The operator or setup person can manually  cycle the machine into a safe condition by using the stored energy.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The hopper gate cylinder shown in Figure 1-20 must close in case of a power  failure. If the gate stays open, the entire hopper could overflow the truck  under it, then dump on the ground. This circuit uses a pressure-compensated pump  that maintains pressure with minimal heating during normal operation. An  accumulator &lt;i&gt;F&lt;/i&gt; stores the first pump flow, check valve &lt;i&gt;D&lt;/i&gt; stops  accumulator back flow, and normally open directional valves &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt; isolate the  accumulator from the cylinder and tank during normal operation.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="280"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-20 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig120gif_00000043833.gif" width="280" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The gate cylinder needs at least 1500 psi, so the pump compensator is set for  2000 psi. This ensures that the accumulator has enough fluid to extend the  cylinder when necessary. Because the solenoids on valves &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt; are energized  by the pump start command, the accumulator is completely isolated from the  cylinder and tank as long as the pump runs. When solenoid &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; of the 4-way  directional valve shifts (as seen in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-21&lt;/b&gt;), the gate opens as fast  as the pump moves it.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="266"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-21 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig121gif_00000043834.gif" width="266" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When solenoid &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; shifts the 4-way directional valve, as seen in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-22&lt;/b&gt;, the gate closes as fast as the pump moves it. When the power  is on, the cylinder extends or retracts partially or all the way at the  operator’s command.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="262"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-22 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig122gif_00000043835.gif" width="262" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;If the gate cylinder is partially or completely open and power fails, the  circuit automatically goes to the condition shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-23&lt;/b&gt;. In this  condition the pump stops, the 4-way directional valve centers, and the normally  open 2-way shutoff valves &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt; open.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="293"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-23 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig123gif_00000043836.gif" width="293" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When power fails, the accumulator has a direct path to the cap end of the  cylinder while rod-end oil flows to tank. The cylinder will extend and close the  gate using the stored energy in the accumulator. &lt;b&gt;Place warning signs at the  gate indicating this equipment can operate at any time without operator  intervention.&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When using an accumulator for emergency power supply it is difficult to  automatically drain it during normal operation. Automatically draining the  accumulator would defeat its purpose as an emergency power supply. Add a manual  drain valve &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt;, with &lt;b&gt;warning signs to tell maintenance persons to  manually drain the accumulator before working on the gate circuit.&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Size emergency-power accumulators to hold enough oil to move all actuators to  the home position before pressure drops to dangerous levels. Most manufacturers  provide formulas in their catalogs and offer several offer excellent computer  programs to size accumulators for emergency-power supplies. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Using accumulators for leakage makeup&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some hydraulic circuits, such as in laminating presses, need to hold at  pressure for long periods. A pressure-compensated pump could maintain pressure,  but energy loss from pump leakage generates heat. Another way to hold pressure  for long periods is with a fixed-volume pump and an accumulator. &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-24&lt;/b&gt; shows a press cylinder that must stay extended under pressure for  several minutes.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="298"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-24 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig124gif_00000043837.gif" width="298" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Tee small accumulator &lt;i&gt;D&lt;/i&gt; into the cylinder cap-end line through flow  control &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt;. Flow control &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt; allows the accumulator to fill quickly  but discharge slowly when directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; centers or shifts to  retract the cylinder. Flow control &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt; should pass enough flow to let the  accumulator discharge quickly without system shock when directional valve  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; shifts to retract the cylinder. Any oil left in the accumulator when  the directional valve centers will make the cylinder extend a small amount. Tee  dump valve &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; into the cylinder cap-end line to automatically discharge  the accumulator when the pump stops. Tee pressure switch &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt; into the  cap-end cylinder line to set pump load and unload pressure. Pressure switch  &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt; sets high and low pressures to control maximum and minimum tonnage.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="294"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-25 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig125gif_00000043838.gif" width="294" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When the pump starts, &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-25&lt;/b&gt;, backpressure check valve &lt;i&gt;F&lt;/i&gt;  gives 75 psi pressure, closing accumulator dump valve &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; and supplying  pilot oil for solenoid pilot-operated directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;. When  directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; shifts, the cylinder starts to extend, &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-26&lt;/b&gt;, at whatever pressure it takes to overcome the counterbalance valve.  The signal to the extend coil of directional valve&lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; goes through the  normally closed contacts on pressure switch &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt;. Because gas pre-charge  pressure in the accumulator is approximately 85% of working pressure, no fluid  will enter it yet.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="287"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-26 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig126gif_00000043839.gif" width="287" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When the cylinder contacts the work, &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-27&lt;/b&gt;, pressure increases  and oil fills the accumulator. Upon reaching the maximum working pressure set by  pressure switch &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt;, the normally closed contacts open, de-energizing the  solenoid on directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;. Directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; spring  centers, the pump unloads, and oil stored in the accumulator maintains pressure  while making up for cylinder and valve leakage.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="289"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-27 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig127gif_00000043840.gif" width="289" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Bypass at the cylinder seals and/or valve causes pressure to drop slowly to  the low-pressure setting of pressure switch&lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt;. This low-pressure setting  is normally adjustable but must be high enough to keep the parts firmly  together. Upon reaching the low-pressure setting, pressure switch &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt;  shifts, allowing the normally closed contacts to shift directional valve  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; to refill the accumulator. Upon reaching maximum working pressure,  directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; again spring centers to unload the pump, while the  accumulator holds its pressing force and makes up for leaks.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;A pilot-operated check valve in the cap-end cylinder line between the  directional valve and the pressure switch would have less leakage than the  blocked port of the spool valve. With a pilot-operated check valve and resilient  seals in the cylinder, it is possible to maintain pressure for 2 to 5 min or  more. Use an all-ports-open directional valve with the pilot-operated check  valve. This accumulator circuit maintains pressure in the cylinder while  unloading the pump. It also conserves energy while using an inexpensive  fixed-volume pump. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Using accumulators as shock absorbers&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Accumulators can reduce damage from shock in some circuits if correctly  applied. In other applications, an accumulator may add shock by releasing stored  energy too quickly.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The top half of &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-28&lt;/b&gt; illustrates one way shock is produced.  Flow velocity in a hydraulic circuit may be 25 to 30 fps and not cause any  problems. However, if oil flow stops abruptly, as seen in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-28’s&lt;/b&gt;  middle example, damaging shock can rip out tubing, blow seals, and split pump  housings with ease. A column of moving fluid has a lot of energy that can get  out of control.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="480"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-28 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig128gif_00000043841.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The third example in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-28&lt;/b&gt; shows a small accumulator teed into  the line at the shut off that stops flow suddenly. An accumulator spreads the  shock energy over a short period of time and eliminates the potential for  damage.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;To absorb flow shock, the accumulator is usually pre-charged at about 70 to  80% of system pressure. At this pre-charge pressure, only a small amount of  fluid enters the accumulator subsequent to a shock situation. There is also  little fluid transfer to take away from or add to the normal pump flow.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When it is necessary to stop a heavy load, such as shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-29&lt;/b&gt;, try using an accumulator and a hydraulic cylinder. The accumulator’s  pre-charge pressure holds the cylinder extended, thus making it ready for the  advancing mass. When the load contacts the cylinder, it mechanically forces it  to retract. As the cylinder retracts, fluid flows into the accumulator and gas  pressure increases. As pressure increases, the higher resistance slows the mass  more. After the load decelerates, the cylinder might try to push the part away.  Add valves between the accumulator and the cylinder to control the shock  absorber after it finishes decelerating the load.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="454"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-29 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig129gif_00000043842.gif" width="454" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some large, slow-turning piston pumps send a shock wave into the circuit  every time a piston discharges oil. On the left of &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-30&lt;/b&gt;, the  piston pump does not have an accumulator at the discharge port. Pressure at the  gauge will fluctuate from less than system pressure to well above it without an  accumulator.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="480"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-30 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67862Fig130gif_00000043843.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;On the right side of &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-30&lt;/b&gt;, adding a small accumulator reduces  discharge flow and shock damage. A portion of the sudden discharge flow from an  advancing piston goes into the accumulator and discharges smoothly while waiting  for the next stroke. The pre-charge pressure for this type of accumulator  circuit is about 60 to 75% of maximum system pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Accumulator manufacturers have formulas in their brochures to calculate any  situation mentioned here. Some suppliers have computer programs that do all the  math after asking for circuit parameters.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Pump supplementing circuit with full pressure when work is contacted&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;In some cases, a pump-supplementing accumulator circuit can speed up cylinder  extension and/or retraction without having to go above working pressure.  Normally in a pump-supplementing circuit, the relief valve is set as high as  possible above the working pressure to store ample fluid. As the cycle  progresses, oil from the accumulator and pump move the actuator quickly, but  circuit pressure drops steadily. If pressure drops below the actuator’s need,  the pump must refill the accumulator before the cycle finishes. To overcome this  problem, a larger pump and/or more accumulators are necessary.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The next circuit shows an accumulator arrangement that provides high volume  to move the cylinder rapidly with the relief valve set at working pressure. The  accumulator and pump supply volume to fill the large bore cylinder as it  extends. The cylinder then moves to working pressure while a check valve  isolates the accumulator.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Like all accumulator circuits, there must be time for refilling between  cycles, as shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-31&lt;/b&gt;. Pre-charge the accumulator to a pressure  slightly higher than it takes to retract the cylinder. The cylinder will then  retract when directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; and normally open, solenoid-operated  relief valve &lt;i&gt;H&lt;/i&gt; shift. (Also see &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-34&lt;/b&gt;.) The large piston rod  reduces the return volume, although retract pressure will be higher. When the  cylinder fully retracts, pressure climbs and the accumulator starts to fill  through check valve &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt; and the bypass check valve around flow control  &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt;. Piston-type accumulators are best for this circuit because they can  have a low pre-charge pressure and a high final pressure without internal  damage. The accumulator can discharge a large volume of oil because the pressure  in it is not important when the cylinder needs full tonnage.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="293"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-31 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig131gif_00000043844.gif" width="293" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When pressure in the circuit reaches 2000 psi, pressure switch &lt;i&gt;G&lt;/i&gt;  de-energizes the solenoid on normally open, solenoid-operated relief valve  &lt;i&gt;H&lt;/i&gt;, unloading the pump to tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; and normally open, solenoid-operated relief  valve &lt;i&gt;H&lt;/i&gt; shift, &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-32&lt;/b&gt;, pump flow and accumulator flow provide  a large volume of oil to quickly stroke the cylinder to the work. Because  accumulators can discharge at a very high rate, use flow control &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt; to set  the desired advance speed. Pressure in the circuit will fall as the cylinder  extends and will be well below working pressure before the cylinder meets the  work.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="298"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-32 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig132gif_00000043845.gif" width="298" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When the cylinder contacts the work, &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-33&lt;/b&gt;, check valve &lt;i&gt;F&lt;/i&gt;  keeps pump flow from going to the accumulator. The pump will continue filling  the cylinder and pressure will build to whatever it takes to do the work. Check  valve &lt;i&gt;F&lt;/i&gt; blocks flow to the accumulator to isolate it during the  high-pressure work stroke.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="286"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-33 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig133gif_00000043846.gif" width="286" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When directional valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; shifts to the retract position, Figure 1-34,  pump flow goes to the cylinder rod end. The accumulator pre-charge is high  enough to force all pump flow to the cylinder, causing it to quickly  retract.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="290"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-34 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig134gif_00000043847.gif" width="290" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 1-31&lt;/b&gt; shows the cylinder reaching the top of the stroke. The  accumulator now accepts all pump flow through check valve &lt;i&gt;E&lt;/i&gt; until  pressure switch &lt;i&gt;G&lt;/i&gt; unloads the pump. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Two other pump-supplementing circuits with full pressure when work is  contacted&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figures 1-35 and 1-36&lt;/b&gt; depict two more ways to use an accumulator for  volume and still have immediate high pressure for doing work. Either circuit  works equally well with the two pump types shown. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="385"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-35 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig135gif_00000043848.gif" width="385" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;These circuits would normally require a piston-type accumulator. Notice the  pre-charge is less than one-third of maximum pressure. The large pressure  difference would squeeze the bladder in a bladder-type accumulator so much that  holes caused by chafing would allow the nitrogen gas to leak. The minimum  pressure in the circuit could be even lower than shown here. If the actuators  can move at 300 psi, then use 150 to 200 psi pre-charge. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="355"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-36 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig136gif_00000043849.gif" width="355" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figure 1-35 uses a pressure-compensated pump and a normally  open, poppet-type, 2-way directional valve. All flow goes directly to the  accumulator, filling it to maximum pressure with the pump operating. When the  cylinders start to cycle, flow from the pump and accumulator move them rapidly.  When the cylinders contact the work, pressure is well below the required amount.  To get full force, energize solenoid &lt;i&gt;C1&lt;/i&gt;. This stops pump flow to the  accumulator and raises the cylinders to full pressure. De-energize solenoid  &lt;i&gt;C1&lt;/i&gt; when the cylinders finish their work to allow the accumulator to  refill.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Energizing solenoid &lt;i&gt;C1&lt;/i&gt; when the actuators are moving is possible with  a correctly designed poppet valve. Notice the blocked position of the valve has  a check valve symbol, meaning it only stops flow to the accumulator. This type  of poppet valve provides accumulator volume to the actuators when pressure is  low. However, maximum pressure is immediately available when the cylinders meet  resistance. De-energize solenoid &lt;i&gt;C1&lt;/i&gt; at the end of the cycle to refill the  accumulator. Some poppet-type directional valves have a very high pressure drop  when flowing through the closed check valve. Use a brand designed for low  pressure drop in this circuit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-36&lt;/b&gt; has a fixed-volume pump with a normally  open,, solenoid-operated relief valve and pressure switch to unload the pump at  maximum pressure. Minimum system pressure for this circuit is 1500 psi.  Therefore, it is important to set the sequence valve in front of the accumulator  to this pressure. Set the pressure switch to unload the pump at 1700 psi. Then  set the normally open, solenoid-operated relief valve at approximately 1900 psi.  Because no oil can go to the accumulator if the system pressure is below 1500  psi, the actuators will always have maximum force anytime they meet resistance.  When the cylinders are moving to and from the work, pump and accumulator flow  can combine to give rapid movement at reduced pressure. Flow from the  accumulator can always go to the cylinders through the bypass check valve. Fluid  only goes to the accumulator when pump flow is greater than the system requires.  This circuit fills the accumulator anytime the cylinders stop or anytime  required volume is less than pump output.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;There will be some heating of the oil while the accumulator is filling until  system pressure reaches 1500 psi or above. One advantage is that no control  circuitry is necessary, even while the accumulator fills anytime actuator volume  is less than pump flow.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Non-invasive way to check accumulator pre-charge&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;It is important to check accumulator pre-charge pressure at regular  intervals. Check a new installation each shift for a few days to see if there is  a gas-pressure loss. It the gas charge is holding, check pre-charge pressure  weekly for the next month. If all is well at the end of a month, then monthly  checks should be more than satisfactory.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The normal way to check pre-charge pressure is: (1). Shut down the system.  (2). Attach a gauge and charging kit to the accumulator. (3). Open the gas valve  and check the pressure reading. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;However, this procedure is time consuming, allows some gas to discharge, and  may damage the charging valve, which can result in a continuous leak. Outlined  below is a simple, non-invasive way to check accumulator pre-charge pressure to  see if gas is leaking.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="368"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-37 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig137gif_00000043850.gif" width="368" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 1-37&lt;/b&gt; shows a partial accumulator circuit. This figure shows an  operating hydraulic system, just as the pump stops. At this point, the  accumulator relief/unload/dump valve is open, draining pressurized oil stored in  the accumulator. As fluid in the accumulator discharges, pressure at gauge  &lt;i&gt;PG1&lt;i&gt; starts dropping. By controlling the flow with a fixed orifice or a  flow control, pressure deteriorates slowly when there is oil in the  accumulator.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="364"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-38 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig138gif_00000043851.gif" width="364" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;When all fluid is out of the accumulator, &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-38&lt;/b&gt;, pressure at  gauge &lt;i&gt;PG1&lt;/i&gt; will suddenly drop to zero. Carefully note gauge pressure when  it suddenly drops. The pressure seen at the sudden drop is the present  pre-charge pressure of the accumulator. This reading is only as accurate as the  gauge and the person reading it. It is not a perfect reading, but will be close  enough to see if a full-fledged check is needed.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="366"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-39 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig139gif_00000043852.gif" width="366" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;If there is more than one accumulator on the machine, as in &lt;b&gt;Figures 1-39  and 1-40&lt;/b&gt;, this test will show the lowest pre-charge pressure. When a low  pre-charge pressure shows up, check each accumulator individually until finding  those at a lower pressure than required.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="350"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-40 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig140gif_00000043853.gif" width="350" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Another way to check pre-charge pressure is to note the gauge’s pressure  reading when turning on the pump. With an accumulator in the circuit, the first  pressure reading should be pre-charge pressure. It is difficult to obtain an  accurate reading this way with glycerin-filled or orifice-dampened gauges in the  circuit. The gauge should also be at or close to the accumulator to keep line  losses from adding to the reading.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Hydraulic type accumulator dump valves &lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;When using an accumulator, there must be a way to discharge stored oil before  safely working on the circuit. Even when using the accumulator for emergency  power supply, install a manual drain valve for safe operation.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;A manual drain valve with a gauge near it is the best way to ensure a safe  operation. Mark the manual drain valve and place warning signs at all hydraulic  component locations indicating there is an accumulator in the circuit and to  open the manual drain before performing maintenance.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;A common way to discharge stored energy is to use a normally open,  solenoid-operated, 2-way directional valve teed into the pressure line with its  outlet hooked to tank. Wire the solenoid on the 2-way valve to close when the  pump is running. Any time the pump stops, the 2-way solenoid valve de-energizes  and discharges stored oil to tank. &lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;A solenoid-operated valve works well in most cases but can cause problems.  First, if the valve fails to close or only partially closes, oil dumps across  it, generating heat and making it operate sluggishly or not at all. Second, if  the valve fails to open when the pump stops, the circuit is unsafe. This is a  safety hazard for an inexperienced person who might not detect the problem.  Third, additional wiring creates additional costs.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;If the circuit uses a fixed-volume pump as shown in &lt;b&gt;Figures 1-41 through  1-44&lt;/b&gt;, use an accumulator relief/unload/dump valve for most applications.  This valve has an integral adjustable 2-way unloading valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; to unload  the pump when reaching set pressure. Also, there is a pilot valve to close  shut-off &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; that stays closed while the pump is running and opens any time  the pump stops. Isolation check valve (C) keeps accumulator oil from back  flowing to the pump when it stops.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="305"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-41 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig141gif_00000043854.gif" width="305" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;In &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-41&lt;/b&gt; the pump has just started, so pressure jumps to  accumulator pre-charge pressure and all flow goes to the accumulator through  check valve &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt;. Pilot-operated 2-way shut-off &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; pilots closed when  the pump is running. The pilot-operated, adjustable-spring shut-off  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;stays closed until set pressure is reached.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Pressure continues to climb until the accumulator is full, as seen in  &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-42&lt;/b&gt;. When pressure reaches that set on 2-way adjustable-spring  valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;, it opens, unloading the pump to tank at low pressure. Even while  unloading there is enough pressure to keep pilot-operated 2-way shut-off  &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; closed.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="277"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-42 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig142gif_00000043855.gif" width="277" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;When pressure in the circuit drops approximately 15%, &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-43&lt;/b&gt;,  unload-valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; closes, again forcing oil to the circuit and accumulator.  The pump will load and fill the system any time pressure drops about 15%. This  pump load pressure is non-adjustable so it will not work for all circuits.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Some manufacturers offer an accumulator relief/unload/dump valve with an  adjustable differential setting. Setting these valves’ load-unload pressure by  more or less than the 15% differential is possible.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="301"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-43 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig143gif_00000043856.gif" width="301" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;When the pump shuts off, as in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-44&lt;/b&gt;, pilot pressure to 2-way  valve &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; drops, allowing it to open. Now all stored fluid from the  accumulator has a path directly to tank. The accumulator will quickly discharge,  making it safe to work on the circuit.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="277"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-44 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig144gif_00000043857.gif" width="277" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;CAUTION! ALWAYS CHECK AN ACCUMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR PRESSURE BEFORE WORKING  ON IT. NEVER ASSUME THE AUTOMATIC UNLOADING SYSTEM WORKED!&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Hydraulic-type accumulator dump valves (continued)&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;When using an accumulator with a pressure compensated pump, the packaged dump  valve shown works well. (See &lt;b&gt;Figures 1-45 through 1-48&lt;/b&gt;.)&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;A pressure-compensated pump maintains pressure while flow changes to meet the  needs of the circuit. When the first actuator in the system starts to move,  there is no flow for it until pressure drops. As pressure drops, a  pressure-compensated pump will go on stroke quickly but there will be a slight  pause before flow actually starts. The addition of the small accumulator shown  in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-45&lt;/b&gt; nearly eliminates the startup pause. This enhances system  response while reducing cycle time and pressure fluctuations.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="326"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-45 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig145gif_00000043858.gif" width="326" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;On the other end of the cycle, if the pump is at full flow and all the valves  center or all the actuators hit end-of-stroke, flow requirement suddenly goes to  zero. The pressure compensated pump is still flowing at maximum and pressure  starts to climb. The pump will continue at full flow until pressure reaches 80  to 98% of the compensator setting. There has been zero flow needed for some  time, but the pump does not know this until pressure is near maximum. When  pressure reaches the compensator setting, the pump starts to shift to no-flow.  All pump flow during the shifting time has no place to go, so this excess flow  makes a pressure spike of five to ten times the compensator setting. This  pressure spike can cause premature failure of the pump, plumbing, and actuators.  An accumulator as shown will take in this small volume of oil to minimize the  spike.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;As with any accumulator installation, safety is important. When shutting a  circuit down for maintenance, always drain the accumulators. A manual drain  valve works, but the automatic drain shown on the facing page is better. When  the pump starts -- and as long as it is running -- a pilot valve closes check  valve &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; to block the drain port. Check valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; isolates the pump  from accumulator back flow when it stops or fails. There is no electrical wiring  needed, so the accumulator dump valve is invisible to the control circuitry.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;The pump is just starting in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-45&lt;/b&gt;, so pressure immediately  climbs to accumulator pre-charge pressure. Flow continues until the accumulator  is full and system pressure is at its maximum. Pilot-to-close check valve  &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; blocks the drain path to tank when the pump starts. The drain path  stays closed as long as the pump is running.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="316"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-46 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig146gif_00000043859.gif" width="316" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 1-46&lt;/b&gt; shows flow while the circuit is working. Accumulator  and/or pump flow will go to the actuators to quickly start them and move them  through their cycle. During the working part of the cycle, the accumulator  smooths out flow fluctuations, while reducing pressure drops and spikes.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;With the system at rest as shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-47&lt;/b&gt;, pump flow is zero and  the accumulator is full and ready for another cycle.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="311"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-47 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig147gif_00000043860.gif" width="311" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 1-48&lt;/b&gt; shows how the circuit responds when the pump stops. Check  valve &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt; closes to stop back flow and pump motoring. Pressure to  pilot-to-close check &lt;i&gt;B&lt;/i&gt; drops out, allowing it to open. All accumulator  volume now has a path to tank through an orifice that keeps flow at a reasonable  rate. In a very short time the accumulator’s stored energy dissipates, making it  safe to work on the system.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="314"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-48 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig148gif_00000043861.gif" width="314" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;CAUTION! ALWAYS CHECK AN ACCUMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR PRESSURE BEFORE WORKING  ON IT. NEVER ASSUME THE AUTOMATIC UNLOADING SYSTEM WORKED!&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Linear pressure-type accumulators&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;The following circuits use accumulator types with little or no pressure drop  as they discharge fluid.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Gas- or spring-loaded accumulators lose pressure as fluid discharges and the  gas or spring expands. In a typical circuit using this type of accumulator, the  maximum system pressure must be higher than working pressure to allow for this  pressure drop. Some circuits cannot operate at these elevated pressures or may  need high pressure for the entire stroke. Therefore, they can’t use gas or  spring loaded accumulators. &lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-49&lt;/b&gt; shows a weight-loaded accumulator, a  fixed-volume pump, and a normally open, solenoid-operated relief valve that can  replace either circuit shown in &lt;b&gt;Figures 1-10 and 1-11.&lt;/b&gt; Notice the maximum  pressure and working pressure are at 2000 psi. This is possible because the  weight-loaded accumulator does not lose pressure as fluid discharges. Until the  accumulator piston reaches bottom, system pressure stays constant.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="383"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-49 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig149gif_00000043862.gif" width="383" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;With a weight-loaded accumulator, the amount of weight on a given piston area  sets maximum pressure. To raise or lower maximum pressure, weight must be added  or taken off. Set the relief valve on this type circuit 100 to 150 psi higher  than system pressure so it does not bypass during normal operation.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;The main disadvantage of a weight-loaded accumulator is its physical size. An  accumulator for the circuit shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-49&lt;/b&gt; would require a 10-in.  ram with a 60-in. stroke for the cylinder to have full force for its entire  cycle. This size accumulator needs almost 160,000 lb of weight on the ram to get  the required volume and pressure stated. A block of concrete approximately 1080  ft3 in size or about 10 X 10 X 11 ft would be necessary to meet this need. Such  high mass eliminates the use of this type accumulator for mobile equipment and  also rules out many industrial applications. Using a smaller accumulator ram  with a longer stroke reduces weight, but you must make sure column strength is  adequate when reducing ram diameter.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;The air-cylinder-loaded accumulator shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-50&lt;/b&gt; works the  same as a weight-loaded accumulator. There is a slight pressure drop as fluid  starts to flow due to piston and ram seal friction but this is usually not  enough to cause problems.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="381"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-50 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67863Fig150gif_00000043863.gif" width="381" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Physical size can also be a problem with air-cylinder-loaded accumulators,  especially when using low air pressure. Most plant systems operate at 100 to 125  psi so the unit required to handle the cylinder in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-50&lt;/b&gt; might be a  40-in. bore air cylinder driving a 9-in. ram with a 75-in. stroke. Using air  pressure at 250 psi could reduce the accumulator to a 30-in. air cylinder  driving a 10_-in. ram for a 55-in. stroke. In either case, these accumulators  are still too large for mobile equipment and for many industrial  applications.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;i&gt;Air-cylinder-loaded accumulators work best and are more economical to operate  using a surge tank for the air cylinder. Surge tanks provide fast flow for  discharging high oil volumes with minimal pressure drop. They also make it  possible to use a small air compressor because it only has to make up for leaks  after the system gets up to pressure. Size the surge tank to allow for a 3- to  8-psi drop when the accumulator discharges during a normal cycle.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-7887083158116064253?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/7887083158116064253/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/3.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/7887083158116064253'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/7887083158116064253'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/3.html' title='المكدسات الهيدروليكيه3'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-4317817358499311110</id><published>2009-07-08T09:06:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T09:11:30.460-07:00</updated><title type='text'>المكدسات الهيدروليكيه2</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;p&gt;Hydraulic accumulators make it possible to store useable volumes of  non-compressible fluid under pressure. A 5-gal container completely full of oil  at 2000 psi will only discharge a few cubic inches of fluid before pressure  drops to 0 psi. The same container filled with half oil and half nitrogen gas  would discharge over 11/2 gal of fluid before pressure dropped to 1000 psi.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figures 1-1 through 1-4&lt;/b&gt; show symbols used for different types of  accumulators. &lt;b&gt;Figures 1-5 through 1-8&lt;/b&gt; are simplified cutaways showing  construction of different types of accumulators.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="480"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-1 to 1-8 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig11to18g_00000043821.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;All accumulators except &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-4&lt;/b&gt; will have a pressure decrease as  fluid discharges. A weight-loaded accumulator maintains pressure until all oil  is used.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When using an accumulator, it is necessary to install a manual or automatic  function to de-pressurize all fluid before working on the circuit. Several  manufacturers make automatic discharge valves that work well. These automatic  discharge valves are explained at the end of this section.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Most hydraulic accumulators are used in one of four applications: 1.  Supplement pump flow in circuits with medium to long delays between cycles. 2.  Hold pressure in a cylinder while the pump is unloading or stopped. 3. Have a  ready supply of pressurized fluid in case of power failure. 4. Reduce shock in  high velocity flow lines or at the outlet of pulsating piston pumps.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The following circuit images show some circuits using accumulators for the  operations mentioned in 1 to 4 above. Other accumulator circuits and information  follow.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Using accumulators to supplement pump flow&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some hydraulic circuits require a large volume of oil for a short time; for  example to move a large cylinder rapidly to clamp a part. After clamping, the  circuit needs little or no additional fluid for period of time while curing  takes place. When a circuit has extended dwell time, an accumulator can be used  to downsize the pump, motor, tank, and relief valve. The cost of accumulators  usually offsets savings on these smaller components, but downsizing saves on  operating costs.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The conventional pump, directional valve, and cylinder pictured in &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-9&lt;/b&gt; show horsepower and flow requirements needed for a 12.5 sec cycle time.  The advance cycle requires full power, while returning the cylinder needs  minimal force. Reduction of the pump and motor size is not possible if the  cylinder cycles rapidly. However, if there was a 45 sec wait between cycles, the  pump and motor could be almost 70% smaller with an accumulator circuit. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="297"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-9 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig19gif_00000043822.gif" width="297" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;This reduced flow and horsepower are possible when using accumulators and the  circuit shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-10&lt;/b&gt;. The extra expense of the accumulators  offsets the reduced price for the power unit, but operating cost is less for the  life of the machine. The directional valve and piping from the accumulators to  the cylinder still has to handle the 125 gpm flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="330"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-10 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig110gif_00000043823.gif" width="330" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Using a gas charged accumulator in a pump supplementing circuit will increase  maximum system pressure. The extend portion of the cycle needs at least 2000 psi  working pressure, which requires filling the accumulators with fluid above 2000  psi so they can discharge oil and not drop below minimum pressure. The maximum  system pressure should be as high as can be tolerated. The higher the maximum  allowable system pressure, the smaller the accumulators. The drawback of high  pressure is that the circuit is at this pressure when the cycle starts. If this  higher pressure can cause damage or other problems, it should be lowered to a  safe level.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Accumulator circuits normally have flow controls because there is a volume of  oil at elevated pressure that can discharge almost instantaneously. Placing a  flow control at the accumulator outlet allows free flow from pump to accumulator  and adjustable flow to system.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-10&lt;/b&gt; has a minimum pressure of 2000 psi and a  maximum pressure of 3000 psi. This pressure is the limit of most hydraulic  components. A 22-gpm pump driven by a 40-hp motor now meets the force and cycle  time specified. All pump flow continuously goes to the circuit instead of being  unloaded most of the time as in conventional circuits. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the cylinder cycles, the accumulators supply fluid at a rate set by the  flow control. Pump flow adds to accumulator flow to set the required cycle time.  Cylinder cycling could be made faster than specified by increasing outlet flow  from the accumulator.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The fixed-volume pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-10&lt;/b&gt; unloads through a special  accumulator relief/unload/dump valve, which sends all pump flow to the  accumulators and cylinder until the system reaches set pressure. After reaching  set pressure, the valve opens and unloads the pump to tank at approximately 50  psi. The pump will continue to unload until the system pressure drops about 15%.  This pressure drop might be from leakage or at the start of a new cycle. Any  time pressure drops, the pump will load and stay loaded until pressure tries to  go above 3000 psi. With this valve, stored oil in the accumulators automatically  discharges to tank when the pump stops, which makes the circuit safe to work on  shortly after locking and tagging off the pump.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="480"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-11 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig111gif_00000043824.gif" width="480" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;Figure 1-11&lt;/b&gt; shows a variation of the accumulator circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-10&lt;/b&gt;. Here a 1-gpm fixed-volume pump and a 5-gpm pressure-compensated pump  supply oil until the accumulators fill. A pressure switch, set at about 2900  psi, unloads the fixed-volume pump through a solenoid-operated relief valve.  After the fixed-volume pump unloads, the pressure-compensated pump finishes  filling the accumulators and holds maximum pressure without fluctuations and  with minimal heating.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The accumulator dump valve in this circuit will stay closed as long as the  pumps are running. When the pumps stop, this valve quickly and automatically  discharges the accumulators to tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Full-time pressure with fixed-volume pumps&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some circuits need pressure at all times to hold position or maintain force.  The circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-12&lt;/b&gt; holds pressure on the cylinders when they  stop, but excessive heat generation makes it a poor choice. Flow controls keep  pressure in the circuit while a cylinder is moving.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="386"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-12 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig112gif_00000043825.gif" width="386" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some designers use the circuit shown in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-13&lt;/b&gt; to simultaneously  reduce energy loss and maintain holding pressure. This double-pump circuit  provides high flow (to move the cylinders rapidly) and low flow (for pressure  holding). While the system is at holding pressure, the high-flow pump goes to  tank through an unloading valve. Only the low-flow pump goes across the relief  valve. Although energy loss is drastically reduced, it is still excessive.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="351"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-13 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig113gif_00000043826.gif" width="351" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuits shown in &lt;b&gt;Figures 1-14&lt;/b&gt; and 1-15 use a small accumulator to  hold pressure on the actuators while unloading the pump at minimum pressure.  This makes it possible to use a less expensive fixed-volume pump instead of a  pressure-compensated pump, with little or no energy loss or heat generation.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="354"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-14 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig114gif_00000043827.gif" width="354" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="425"&gt; &lt;caption align="top"&gt;Fig-1-15 &lt;/caption&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/67861Fig115gif_00000043828.gif" width="425" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The pump in &lt;b&gt;Figure 1-14&lt;/b&gt; unloads through an accumulator  relief/unload/dump valve. This valve sends all pump flow to the accumulator and  cylinders until the system reaches set pressure. After it reaches set pressure,  the valve opens and unloads the pump to tank at approximately 50 psi. The pump  will continue to unload until the system pressure drops about 15%. This pressure  drop might be from leakage or it could be at the start of a new cycle. The pump  loads again and fills the circuit until pressure tries to go above 2000 psi.  While the pump unloads, the accumulator makes up for any leakage so pressure at  the cylinders only drops about 15% maximum. The length of time the pump unloads  depends on the size of the accumulator and the amount of system leakage. With  the accumulator relief/unload/dump valve, stored oil in the accumulator  discharges to tank when the pump stops. This makes the circuit safe to work on  shortly after locking and tagging out the pump.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Notice the variation of the above pressure holding circuit in &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-15&lt;/b&gt;. Here the pump unloads through a normally open, solenoid-operated  relief valve controlled by a pressure switch. The accumulator and actuators fill  from the pump until system pressure reaches 2000 psi. At 2000 psi, the pump  unloads through a solenoid operated relief valve at approximately 50 psi. The  main advantage of the circuit in Figure 1-15 is that pressure drop is adjustable  by more or less than the fixed 15% allowed by the unloading valve in &lt;b&gt;Figure  1-14&lt;/b&gt;.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;To have a safe accumulator circuit, it is necessary to have a means to  discharge stored energy at shutdown. The circuit in Figure 1-15 uses a  high-ratio pilot-to-close check valve. The pilot ratio is about 200:1, which  means 25 psi in the pilot line can hold as much as 5000 psi in the circuit. Most  unloading circuits have at least 25 psi while unloaded, so this valve works  well. When the pump shuts off, pressure drops to zero, the pilot-to-close check  valve opens, and stored energy dumps to tank.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another way to automatically discharge the accumulator at shutdown is with a  normally open, solenoid-operated, 2-way directional valve. This directional  valve connects to the accumulator pressure line and on to tank. Starting the  pump motor also energizes the solenoid on the normally open 2-way valve, causing  it to close. As long as the pump runs, this valve blocks the flow path to tank.  When the pump stops, the solenoid is deenergized, and the valve shifts to port  stored energy to tank. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;b&gt;CAUTION! ALWAYS CHECK AN ACCUMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR PRESSURE BEFORE WORKING  ON IT. NEVER ASSUME THE AUTOMATIC UNLOADING SYSTEM WORKED!&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-4317817358499311110?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/4317817358499311110/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/2.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/4317817358499311110'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/4317817358499311110'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/2.html' title='المكدسات الهيدروليكيه2'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-5753220414863753409</id><published>2009-07-08T09:05:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T09:06:16.192-07:00</updated><title type='text'>المكدسات الهيدروليكيه</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;table&gt;&lt;tbody&gt;&lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;Frequently, pumps can be downsized if the circuit uses an accumulator. The  accumulator volume adds to that of both pumps to speed downward travel of the  press ram. When the ram meets sufficient resistance, the pressure switch shifts  the solenoid valve. This directs fluid from the large pump to recharge the  accumulator, while the small pump continues to supply high-pressure fluid to the  ram. When the manually operated, 4-way valve is shifted for the return stroke,  pressure is relieved, the solenoid valve is de-energized, and both pumps and the  accumulator deliver fluid for rapid return.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="/fpe/images/circuits1_2.gif" border="0" height="178" width="212" /&gt;  &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Traverse and clamp&lt;/h3&gt;In this arrangement, fluid from the large accumulator  combines with pump output to extend the cylinder rapidly. Fully extending it  trips the limit switch to actuate solenoid (c). The small accumulator maintains  high clamping pressure on the cylinder for a timed period, during which the pump  recharges the large accumulator. Any fluid lost by the small accumulator will  also be replaced during this time.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="/fpe/images/circuits1_3.gif" border="0" height="193" width="193" /&gt;  &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Standby power source&lt;/h3&gt;In this diesel engine starting circuit, maximum  power is required for a short period, with long time between operations. Power  for starting is stored in the accumulators. During operation, the main pump  charges the accumulators to the pressure setting of the unloading valve. The  pump is unloaded for the remainder of running time. For starting, the manual  valve is opened, connecting the combined output from the accumulators to drive  the fluid motor. The hand pump recharges the accumulators in case of  leakage.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="/fpe/images/circuits1_4.gif" border="0" height="139" width="176" /&gt;  &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Surge reduction&lt;/h3&gt;Operating the 4-way, closed-center valve in this circuit  can cause the formation of shock pressures several times the value of the  maximum pressure setting on the relief valve. Because the relief valve cannot  act fast enough to drain off fluid, the high pressures can be dangerous to  personnel and equipment. The accumulator in this circuit absorbs the surge  pressures generated when the valve is placed in the neutral position&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="/fpe/images/circuits1_5.gif" border="0" height="176" width="177" /&gt;  &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Clamping&lt;/h3&gt;Holding pressure, leakage compensation, and power savings are  obtained by using the accumulator in this vise circuit. While the vise jaws are  in the clamp position, pressure is held by the accumulator, and pump output is  unloaded at low pressure. The accumulator compensates for any leakage past the  piston seals in the cylinder. When clamping pressure drops below the setting of  the unloading valve, the valve closes, and the pump recharges the  accumulator.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="/fpe/images/circuits1_6.gif" border="0" height="210" width="173" /&gt;  &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Increased speed&lt;/h3&gt;Using a pilot-operated check valve allows adding fluid  from the accumulator to pump output at the proper time within a cycle. Operating  the manual valve directs fluid to retract the cylinder, exerting a pulling  force. When pressure increases, the check valve opens, connecting the  accumulator to the cylinder for fast action. Releasing the manual valve allows  the pump to recharge the accumulator to the pressure setting of the unloading  valve.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="" src="/fpe/images/circuits1_7.gif" border="0" height="210" width="173" /&gt;  &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Safety device&lt;/h3&gt;These mill rolls are loaded by hydraulic pressure. Using  an accumulator allows running the pump unloaded most of the time, which saves  power. The accumulator also protects the rolls from damage if a large piece of  foreign matter enters the mill by absorbing fluid displaced when the roll rises.  This fluid returns to the circuit when the foreign matter has passed through.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-5753220414863753409?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/5753220414863753409/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_6303.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/5753220414863753409'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/5753220414863753409'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_6303.html' title='المكدسات الهيدروليكيه'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-1618595284903654129</id><published>2009-07-08T08:58:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T09:00:19.140-07:00</updated><title type='text'>الدوائر الهيدروليكيه  المعقده</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;p&gt;Pressure- or fatigue-testing machines often require high pressure for long  periods of time. Other circuits might need a small volume of high-pressure fluid  for a short period while most of the cycle only needs low pressure. Other  machines can use air cylinders to manipulate a part but need very high pressure  to perform one operation. Some manufacturers make high-pressure rotary pumps —  rated up to approximately 10,000 psi — but these pumps are expensive and may  heat the fluid. Another choice for low-volume/high-pressure circuits is an  intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;When a circuit calls for a small volume of high-pressure oil or  air, consider using an intensifier — sometimes called a &lt;i&gt;booster&lt;/i&gt;. Most  cylinder manufacturers build air- or hydraulic-powered intensifiers. Or you can  use off-the-shelf cylinder parts to assemble your own booster. Also,  intensification is a natural function of single-rod cylinders and motor-type  flow dividers.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="300"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-1" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig131gif_00000056389.gif" height="180" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-1. Air-oil intensifier symbol.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-1 pictures the symbol for an air-oil intensifier. While the symbol  shows two pistons with different diameters, the actual intensifier consists of a  piston pushing a rod. The large-area air piston pushes a small-area hydraulic  ram against trapped oil. The difference between the two areas gives  high-pressure capability at the small ram. This capability is indicated by the  area ratio. If the air piston has a 5-in. diameter and the oil piston has a  1-in. diameter, the area ratio is 25:1. With this area ratio, 80 psi acting on  the air piston produces 2000 psi at the hydraulic piston.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="300"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-2" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig132gif_00000056390.gif" height="193" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-2. Reciprocating air-oil intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Stroke length dictates the maximum volume of high-pressure fluid from an  intensifier configured as in Figure 13-1. The booster in Figure 13-2 produces  the same pressure but an unlimited volume. A reciprocating intensifier takes  fluid from a reservoir and forces it into the circuit. In effect, the  reciprocating intensifier is a single-piston pressure-compensated pump. The area  ratio and air pressure determine the maximum hydraulic pressure. This pump is  close to 100% efficient, so oil heating is not a problem. Intensifiers do not  need relief valves because they stall at maximum pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="300"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-3" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig133gif_00000056391.gif" height="230" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-3. Oversize-rod intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The oversize-rod cylinder shown in Figure 13-3 also is an intensifier. Any  single-rod cylinder intensifies pressure with the rod end port blocked. The  larger the rod diameter, the greater the intensification. For low  intensification — say 1.5 to 2 times system pressure — a single-rod cylinder is  inexpensive and readily available.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="300"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-4" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig134gif_00000056392.gif" height="177" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-4. Motor-type flow-divider/intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-4 depicts the symbol for a motor-type flow divider used as an  intensifier. This type intensifier produces a continuous flow of higher-pressure  oil at a reduced flow rate. The reduced flow rate is the same ratio as the  pressure increase. (A 2:1 intensifier reduces the flow by 50%.) A motor-type  flow divider intensifier is less efficient than a piston-type intensifier and is  not recommended for applications with long holding periods.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="300"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-5" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig135gif_00000056393.gif" height="175" width="300" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-5. Air-to-air intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-5 shows the symbol for an air-to-air intensifier. These  intensifiers produce small volumes of higher-pressure air from the plant air  supply. Ratios up to 4:1 are common. Hydraulically driven designs with higher  ratios are available from some manufacturers.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Intensifier circuit using standard cylinders&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The schematic diagram in Figures 13-6 through 13-9 suggests how to use  standard cylinders as an air-hydraulic intensifier. This is a quick way to get  high ratio intensification for a rush job. A 6-in. bore air cylinder driving a  1.5-in. bore hydraulic cylinder gives an intensification ratio of 16:1. With  80-psi input air, hydraulic output pressure is approximately 1300 psi. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-6" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig136gif_00000056394.gif" height="295" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-6. Air-oil intensifier circuit using standard cylinders.  System on and ready.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Mount the cylinders to a beam or machine member and pipe them as shown in the  Figures 13-6. This circuit allows a hydraulic cylinder to operate at low  pressure during extension and retraction, with a short high-pressure work stroke  to clamp, punch, or do other work. The circuit includes shop-made intensifier  &lt;i&gt;A&lt;/i&gt;, air-oil tank &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;, air-pilot-operated hydraulic check valve  &lt;i&gt;C&lt;/i&gt;, solenoid-operated 5-way air valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;, sequence operated 5-way  air valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;, and work cylinder &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt;. With solenoid &lt;em&gt;S1&lt;/em&gt;  deenergized, the cylinder and intensifier stay fully retracted, ready for a work  stroke.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-7" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig137gif_00000056395.gif" height="303" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-7. Air-oil intensifier circuit using standard cylinders.  Work cylinder advancing at low pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Energizing solenoid &lt;em&gt;S1&lt;/em&gt; on valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;, as in Figure 13-7,  directs air to air-oil tank &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; and exhausts the rod end of cylinder  &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt;. Oil from the air-oil tank free-flows through check valve &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt;  to extend the cylinder rapidly. Pressure in the line to the cylinder’s cap end  remains low as the cylinder moves toward the work, so sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;  stays in its normal position. The cylinder extends until it contacts the  work.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-8" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig138gif_00000056396.gif" height="298" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-8. Air-oil intensifier circuit using standard cylinders.  Work cylinder holding at high pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;After the cylinder contacts the work, pressure in its cap-end port  increases. Figure 13-8 shows the circuit condition after this pressure buildup  shifts sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;. When sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;shifts, air goes  to the cap end of the 6-in. cylinder on intensifier &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt;and exhausts from  its rod end. Cylinder &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt;extends to stroke the 1-1/2-in. hydraulic  cylinder. This forces high-pressure oil to the cap end of work cylinder  &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt;. Check valve &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; is held closed by its spring to block  high-pressure oil from going to air-oil tank &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;. Pressure in the cap end  of cylinder &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; rises to approximately 1300 psi — and is available to  power any high-force operation. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;The intensifier’s hydraulic cylinder must provide enough oil to  move the work cylinder through its high-pressure stroke. A 3.25-in. bore work  cylinder with a high-pressure work stroke of 0.75 in. requires a minimum 6.22  in.3 intensifier volume. Calculate volume by multiplying the area of the working  cylinder by the length of the high-pressure work stroke. To figure the minimum  intensifier stroke, divide the volume required for the work cylinder by the area  of the intensifier. In this example, the minimum intensifier stroke is 3.5 in.  To make sure there is always enough high-pressure oil to do the job, add 1.0 to  1.5 in. to the intensifier stroke to allow for oil compressibility, hose  stretch, and possible future needs. Choose an intensifier stroke of at least 5  in. for this application. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-9" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig139gif_00000056397.gif" height="307" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-9. Air-oil intensifier circuit using standard cylinders.  Work cylinder retracting at low pressure.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Deenergizing solenoid&lt;em&gt; S1&lt;/em&gt; on valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;, Figure 13-9, directs  air to the rod end of cylinder &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; and to the pilot port of  air-pilot-operated check valve &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt;. Check valve &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; opens,  providing oil from the cap end of cylinder &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; with a free path to tank.  Pilot pressure to sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt; drops when valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; shifts.  When sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt; returns to its normal position, intensifier  &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt; retracts and fills the intensifier cylinder with oil for the next  cycle. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Notice that as cylinder &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; retracts, only 80-psi air  pressure drives it. There is ample hydraulic pressure to extend the cylinder for  the high-force work stroke, but only air pressure to retract it. If a higher  retracting force is needed (to disengage tooling or for other reasons), external  help or other circuit changes may be necessary.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Adjust hydraulic pressure to the cylinder with a regulator in the  air line connected to sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;. With a regulator to adjust the  air pressure, changing hydraulic force is simple.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Hydraulic cylinder &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; should have resilient seals that  keep oil from leaking to the air side or air to the oil side. Some circuits use  two air-oil tanks on cylinder &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; to prevent aeration of the oil.  (Chapter 3 has information about sizing and hooking up air-oil tanks.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Three-head intensifier circuit with tandem cylinder&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Several manufacturers produce 3-head intensifiers that eliminate external  pilot-operated check valves. The first head on a 3-head intensifier has an air  seal on its rod facing the air side and a hydraulic seal facing the oil side.  The second head has an oil port into the rod chamber and a resilient seal facing  the third head. The third head has a welded-on oil chamber that the piston rod  enters. When the piston rod advances, it displaces oil from this chamber to  create high pressure. The ratio of the air-piston area to the rod area  intensifies the pressure by up to 40:1, or even higher. A standard 5-in. bore  air cylinder with a 1-in. diameter piston rod produces 25:1 intensification.  (This is a standard size for several manufacturers.) Three-head intensifiers  supply a small volume of oil for short high-pressure work strokes. Calculate the  high-pressure oil volume by multiplying the rod area by the stroke length after  the rod passes the seal between the second and third head.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-10" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1310gif_00000056398.gif" height="292" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-10. Tandem-cylinder air-oil intensifier circuit with  typical 3-head intensifier. System is on and ready.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-10 shows how 3-head intensifier &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; pressurizes air-oil  tandem cylinder &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt;. This circuit provides rapid low-force advance and  retract strokes, with a short high-force work stroke when the cylinder meets  resistance. Solenoid-operated directional valve &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; extends the air part  of the tandem cylinder. Sequence valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; operates intensifier  &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt;. Sealed expansion tank &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;receives oil from the tandem  cylinder while it extends at high pressure. For an expansion tank, mount an air  filter with a clear bowl upside down, and remove the filter element. The  transparent bowl makes it easy to check oil levels. This circuit eliminates  air-oil tanks to make the system more compact. Figure 13-10 shows the circuit at  rest. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-11" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1311gif_00000056399.gif" height="324" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-11. Tandem-cylinder air-oil intensifier circuit with  typical 3-head intensifier. Tandem cylinder is advancing  rapidly.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Shifting solenoid &lt;em&gt;S1&lt;/em&gt; on valve &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;, as in Figure 13-11, makes  the air-oil tandem cylinder advance rapidly to the work. Oil in the double  rod-end cylinder transfers from front to back through the center head of  intensifier &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt;. (Keep these transfer lines short with oil velocity below  4 fps to minimize pressure drop.) As the cylinder advances, pressure at the cap  port stays low. Adjust the spring on sequence valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; to cycle the  intensifier after the tandem cylinder contacts the work. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-12" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1312gif_00000056400.gif" height="358" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-12. Tandem-cylinder air-oil intensifier circuit with  typical 3-head intensifier. High pressure in tandem cylinder.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;At this contact, sequence valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; shifts to start intensifier  &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; stroking forward, as in Figure 13-12. When the intensifier rod passes  through the seal between heads 2 and 3, pressure intensification begins on the  back of the double rod-end cylinder. As the tandem cylinder extends, trapped oil  from the front chamber goes into expansion tank &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;. (Pressure increases  slightly in the tank because the air trapped above the oil is compressed.) Use a  tank with three to four times the volume displaced by the cylinder during the  high-pressure work stroke. As the intensifier continues to stroke, increased  pressure performs the work. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;It is important that the intensifier contains enough oil to move the tandem  cylinder through its high-pressure stroke. If the double-rod cylinder has a  3.25-in. bore with a 1.375-in. rod, and the high-pressure stroke is 0.375 in.,  then a minimum of 2.55 in.3 of oil is needed. Add considerations for oil  compressibility plus line and cylinder tube expansion to the cylinder  high-pressure stroke volume. Remember: line expansion is greater when using  flexible hose. Determine the volume of oil in the high-pressure portion of the  piping and cylinder, and then increase this volume by 0.5% per thousand psi of  pressure. Often it requires 0.5 to 1.5 in.3 of oil at 2000 psi to make up for  oil compressibility. Calculate oil compressibility and add it to the stroke  volume so the intensifier does not bottom out before the oil reaches the desired  high pressure. On most 3-head intensifiers, add 2.0 in. to the stroke required  for volume to make up for oil that bypasses the rod before it enters the  high-pressure seal between head 2 and head 3.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-13" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1313gif_00000056401.gif" height="348" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-13. Tandem-cylinder air-oil intensifier circuit with  typical 3-head intensifier. Tandem cylinder is retracting rapidly.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-13 shows the intensifier and cylinder retracting. Deenergizing  solenoid &lt;em&gt;S1&lt;/em&gt; on valve &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; lets sequence valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;  spring-return to its normal condition. The intensifier starts retracting at high  speed, but the tandem cylinder moves slowly. When the intensifier passes the  high-pressure seal between heads &lt;em&gt;2&lt;/em&gt; and&lt;em&gt; 3&lt;/em&gt;, the tandem cylinder  quickly returns to its home position.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Reciprocating intensifier for increased volume&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;A single-stroke intensifier produces a limited volume of high-pressure fluid.  Pressure stops building when a single-stroke intensifier reaches the end of its  stroke. If cylinder seals or piping leak, a single-stroke intensifier may build  pressure, but then quickly lose it. When a circuit needs unlimited high-pressure  volume at low flow, use a reciprocating intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 13-14 through 17 show a reciprocating intensifier powering a cylinder  that must hold clamping pressure for days. Reciprocating intensifier &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt;,  air-oil tank &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;, pilot-operated check &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;, solenoid valve  &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;, and sequence valve &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; advance cylinder &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; to the  work rapidly. This arrangement can hold as much as 3200 psi for long periods  without wasting energy or generating heat.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-14" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1314gif_00000056402.gif" height="299" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-14. Air-oil intensifier circuit with purchased  reciprocating intensifier. System is on and ready.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Several companies assemble reciprocating intensifiers with a directional  valve, limit valves, and check valves in a unit. Special-order units may come  with air-oil tanks, special valves, or accumulators — all pre-piped for  operation. When supplied with pressurized air, the unit in Figure 13-14 cycles  and pumps oil until it reaches a maximum pressure. Other units operate from a  pilot signal whenever the machine requires intensified pressure. For even higher  pressures, dual or triple air pistons give higher ratios. Double-acting  intensifiers increase oil volume while using less air. Most manufacturers offer  single-acting intensifiers as standard and double-acting intensifiers as an  option. When a machine needs a low to medium volume of high-pressure oil and has  long holding times, use a reciprocating intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-15" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1315gif_00000056403.gif" height="297" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-15. Air-oil intensifier circuit with purchased  reciprocating intensifier. Intensifier is filling with oil.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit changes as shown in Figure 13-15 after the cylinder contacts the  work. The intensifier starts cycling because pressure buildup shifts sequence  valve &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; to open. Pilot-operated check valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; closes, blocking  pressure fluid from going to tank. Pressure in cylinder &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; is already at  800 psi. As the intensifier retracts, suction draws oil in through the  right-hand check valve to fill the oil chamber. Its spring and the pressure  already in the work cylinder hold the left-hand check valve closed. A  reciprocating intensifier is a low-volume, single-piston, pressure-compensated  pump that continues to move fluid until it reaches maximum pressure. Because  output from the intensifier is intermittent, cylinder movement is jerky, as is  the rate of pressure increase. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-16" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1316gif_00000056404.gif" height="306" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-16. Air-oil intensifier circuit with purchased  reciprocating intensifier. Intensifier is reversing direction.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-16 shows the intensifier changing from filling mode to pumping  mode. The reciprocating air piston depresses the upper cam valve, reducing  pressure on the right end of the double-bleed valve and causing it to shift.  Both check valves close at this time, trapping oil in the cylinder. The  intensifier now starts its pumping stroke.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-17" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1317gif_00000056405.gif" height="291" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-17. Air-oil intensifier circuit with purchased  reciprocating intensifier. Intensifier is filling work cylinder with  high-pressure oil.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The intensifier is extending and discharging fluid through the left check  valve to the actuator in Figure 13-17. Fluid fills the actuator and pressure  increases. The intensifier continues to reciprocate until it reaches maximum  pressure. At maximum pressure, the intensifier stalls but continues to make up  for internal or external leakage.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;With the addition of an accumulator, a reciprocating intensifier could supply  cylinders or motors that operate intermittently. The accumulator stores oil  during machine idle time, and then discharges it at high flow without pulses for  short periods. Use flow controls to slow the rapid uncontrolled movements likely  to occur when using an accumulator.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Oversize-rod cylinder as an intensifier&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;There are times when the operating pressure of a hydraulic system is too low  to produce enough force on a cylinder. The pump’s rated pressure may be  inadequate or the electric motor has too little horsepower for the higher  pressure. Also, other actuators in the system may not be able stand higher  pressure. One answer to this problem is a hydraulic cylinder piped as an  intensifier.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When a single-rod cylinder extends, pressure in the rod end intensifies if  there is any resistance to flow out of it. Resistance could be from a flow  control, counterbalance valve, or simply a restriction. The amount of  intensification depends on the area differential of the cap end to the rod end  of the cylinder. A typical 4.0-in. bore cylinder with a 2.5-in. oversize rod is  sold as a 2:1 ratio. All standard interchangeable cylinders use standard bore  and rod sizes that are close to but not greater than a 2:1 ratio. The 4.0-in.  bore, 2.5-in. rod combination actually has 1.64:1 area differential. With the  rod-end port blocked, a 1.64:1-ratio cylinder produces 1640 psi at the rod end  if the cap-end pressure is 1000 psi. This intensified fluid might cause problems  in a typical circuit, but could supply a small volume of higher-pressure oil for  a short, high-force work stroke from a cylinder.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-18" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1318gif_00000056406.gif" height="331" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-18. 2:1 rod cylinder serving as an intensifier. At rest  with pump running.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The volume of oil entering and leaving the intensifier cylinder has the same  ratio as the intensification. In the 1.64:1 example above, with a cylinder  cap-end flow of 10 gpm, pressure intensified flow from the rod end is 6.1 gpm.  The larger the cylinder rod, the higher the intensified pressure — and the lower  the flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-18 shows a schematic diagram of an oversize-rod cylinder used as an  intensifier. Intensifier cylinder &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt; has 5.0-in. bore with a 3.5-in.  diameter rod. The area of the cap side is 19.64 in.2 and the rod annulus area is  10.01 in.2, giving a ratio of 1.96:1. Every 100 psi in the cap end produces 196  psi in the rod end. Also, 10 gpm entering the cap end pushes 5.1 gpm from the  rod end. Stroke length of intensifier cylinder &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt; must give enough  volume to move work cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; through its high-pressure work stroke.  If cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; has a 10.0-in. bore and a 0.5-in. stroke, the required  volume is approximately 40 in. 3. Dividing the 40-in.3 work-stroke volume by a  10-in.3 intensifier volume indicates that a minimum stroke of 4 in. is needed  from cylinder &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt;. To allow for oil compressibility and leakage, specify  an intensifier stroke of 6 to 8 in. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-19" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1319gif_00000056407.gif" height="334" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-19. 2:1 rod cylinder serving as an intensifier. Work  cylinder is extending rapidly.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The cycle is automatic because sequence valves &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;  control extension and retraction of the intensifier. Cycle time is slightly  slower than the original low-force circuit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 13-19 shows solenoid &lt;em&gt;A1&lt;/em&gt; on directional valve  &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; energized. Fluid flows directly to work cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; through  the free-flow check on sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;. Work cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;  advances rapidly toward the work at low pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-20" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1320gif_00000056408.gif" height="356" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-20. 2:1 rod cylinder serving as an intensifier. Work  cylinder is extending under high pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;At work contact, pressure builds to the setting of sequence valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;,  Figure 13-20. Intensifier cylinder &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt; extends and pressurizes oil in the  cap end of work cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; to approximately twice system pressure.  Before the intensifier bottoms out, it must give enough volume to complete  cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;&lt;em&gt;’s&lt;/em&gt; work stroke. For long holding cycles, calculate  valve and cylinder leakage, then add extra intensifier stroke so pressure  holds.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-21" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1321gif_00000056409.gif" height="341" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-21. 2:1 rod cylinder serving as an intensifier. Both  cylinders retracting.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To retract work cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;, energize solenoid &lt;em&gt;B1&lt;/em&gt; to direct  oil to its rod end, as in Figure 13-21. As cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; retracts,  sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt; forces oil from its cap end to retract intensifier  cylinder &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt;. This saves pump fluid and retracts the intensifier within  normal cycle time. When intensifier cylinder &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; retracts fully, external  pilot-operated sequence valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt; opens and the remainder of the oil in  the work cylinder cap end goes to tank. The only added cycle time is while the  intensifier boosts pressure in the work cylinder.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Motor-type flow divider as an intensifier&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;A motor-type flow divider intensifies pressure at one outlet when the other  outlet is at a lower or no pressure. In the case of a 2-outlet motor flow  divider with equal displacements, when inlet pressure is 1000 psi, one outlet  can be at 2000 psi while the other outlet is 0 psi. While pressure doubles, flow  from the intensified outlet is one half that at the inlet. The energy from the  zero outlet motor transfers to the other motor to produce intensified  pressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;With more than one section going to tank, say from a 4-outlet  divider with three outlets to tank, intensification would be four times. While  the intensified fluid is four times inlet pressure, volume is only one-fourth  inlet flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Using motor dividers with unequal sections is another way to get  high intensification. If the motor in one section discharges 3 gpm to tank and  the other section sends 1 gpm, intensification is still 4:1. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-22" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1322gif_00000056410.gif" height="529" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-22. Motor-type flow divider used as an intensifier. At  rest with pump running.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 13-22 through 25 show how to use this feature of motor-type flow  dividers in a circuit. This circuit has equal flow divider &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; and 3-way  directional valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; in the cylinder cap end line. In the at-rest  condition, both outlets of the flow divider connect to the cap-end port.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="350"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-23" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1323gif_00000056411.gif" height="443" width="350" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-23. Motor-type flow divider used as an intensifier.  Cylinder extending at full speed.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;In Figure 13-23, the cylinder is extending at full speed and low thrust.  Shifting solenoid &lt;em&gt;A1&lt;/em&gt; of the directional valve ports oil through one  side of the divider and 3-way valve to the rod-end port. Fluid from the other  side of the divider goes directly to the cylinder rod-end port. Size the pump  and valves to provide enough flow for the speed required in the fast-forward  portion of the cycle. Normally, motor horsepower is low for a cylinder moving a  light load.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-24" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1324gif_00000056412.gif" height="458" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-24. Motor-type flow divider used as an intensifier.  Cylinder extending at full power.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When the cylinder makes a limit switch, as in Figure 13-24, it energizes  solenoid &lt;em&gt;C1&lt;/em&gt; on the 3-way valve. When the valve shifts, oil from one  section of the motor flow divider goes to tank. Pressure doubles, while cylinder  speed drops to half what it was before energizing solenoid &lt;em&gt;C1&lt;/em&gt;. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;This circuit works best on actuators that do not stall. Using this  setup for a fast advance and clamping operation might result in excess heat from  internal leakage in the flow divider during the clamping part of the cycle.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-25" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1325gif_00000056413.gif" height="537" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-25. Motor-type flow divider used as an intensifier.  Cylinder retracting.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Energizing solenoid &lt;em&gt;B1&lt;/em&gt;, Figure 13-25, makes the cylinder retract.  Oil from the cap-end port flows through both sections of the flow divider, then  back to tank through the directional valve. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;When using a motor-type flow divider as an intensifier, make sure it is  capable of operating at the elevated pressure. Pressure rating of an inexpensive  gear motor flow dividers may be only 2000 psi intermittent and 1500 psi  continuous. Some gerotor flow dividers go as high as 4500 psi intermittent and  3000 psi continuous.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Special air-oil intensifier cylinder&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Some manufacturers build self-contained, air-driven, high-force  hydraulic cylinders. These units look like a very long stroke air cylinder.  Typically, they have 2 to 10 in. total strokes with 1.0- to 1.5-in. high-force  strokes. They often replace a hydraulic unit on a machine that needs high  tonnage for one operation on an otherwise air-powered circuit. Because these  special intensifiers are self-contained, they only require an air supply and a  signal to start them. They have sealed reservoirs so they operate in any  position. They normally have an indicator to monitor oil volume for preventive  maintenance. According to bore size and stroke length, cycle rates go as high as  150 per minute. The bigger the bore and longer the stroke, the fewer the cycles  per minute. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-26" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1326gif_00000056414.gif" height="443" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-26. Special air-oil intensifier cylinder. System on and  ready.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As with other air-oil devices, return power is only cylinder net rod-end area  multiplied by air pressure. The unit may have 50 tons to punch a hole but only  0.5 ton to retract the punch. For high retraction force use springs or urethane  strippers, or add short-stroke return cylinders.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 13-26 has a cutaway view of the intensifier cylinder at  rest. (This view only shows function, not necessarily an actual assembly.) Air  piston and rod &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; with attached hydraulic ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; move rapidly at  low force to the work and return the tooling at the end of the cycle. Ram  &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; is the area that intensified oil pushes on to get the short,  high-force work stroke. Spring-loaded, floating piston &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt; forms the top  of a variable-volume, sealed oil tank. Spring-return air piston &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;  drives its piston rod into trapped oil to intensify pressure for the work  stroke. Directional control valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt; cycles the advance and return  strokes of cylinder &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt;&lt;em&gt;,&lt;/em&gt; and supplies air to pilot sequence  valve &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt;, starting the high-pressure work stroke. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-27" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1327gif_00000056415.gif" height="498" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-27. Special air-oil intensifier cylinder. Fast advance  at low force.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When directional valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt;shifts, as in Figure 13-27, air  piston-and-rod &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; extends the tooling to the work rapidly. As the  piston-and-rod extend, ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; advances and fills with oil from the  variable-volume tank. Vacuum forms in the chamber behind ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;, and the  spring behind the floating piston forces oil into the void. Piston-and-rod  &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; continues to advance and oil transfers until the work is met. This  low-force advance stroke moves quickly (and uses air flow controls when  necessary). Seals on ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; separate oil and air.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-28" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1328gif_00000056416.gif" height="488" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-28. Special air-oil intensifier cylinder. Starting  high-pressure cycle.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 13-28 shows the intensifier after contacting the work. When air  piston-and-rod&lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; stop against the work, pressure build-up behind the  piston shifts sequence valve &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt;. When sequence valve &lt;em&gt;F&lt;/em&gt; shifts,  shop air extends spring-return air piston &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;. The first movement of the  spring-loaded air piston advances the rod to the flow port connecting the tank  to the chamber behind hydraulic ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;. As the rod enters this flow  port, it passes through a resilient seal, stopping flow to tank and sealing the  chamber behind ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;. This action automatically isolates the  low-pressure chamber — eliminating the need for a pilot-operated check  valve.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-29" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1329gif_00000056417.gif" height="509" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-29. Special air-oil intensifier cylinder extending at  low speed with high force.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the spring-return air piston continues to extend, as in Figure 13-29, the  rod displaces oil in the chamber behind hydraulic ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;. In this case,  the area of spring-return piston &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; is 15 times the area of the rod  entering the sealed chamber. The air piston and rod continue to displace oil and  move hydraulic ram &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; until the pressure behind the ram becomes 15 times  greater than the air pressure on the piston. The stroke of spring-return piston  &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; and the diameter of its rod set the maximum high-pressure work  stroke. The higher the intensification ratio and the shorter the stroke, the  less the high-pressure stroke capability.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Deenergizing directional valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt; allows the spring loaded air piston  and the work cylinder to return home. The work cylinder returns slowly while  spring return air piston &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt; retracts past the high-pressure seal.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Air-to-air intensifiers&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Instead of buying a high-pressure compressor when only a small volume of  compressed air is needed, consider using an air-to-air intensifier. Air-to-air  intensifiers are small self-contained units that operate automatically as long  as they have a supply of compressed air. Figure 13-30 shows a generic schematic  of a simple air-to-air intensifier made from stock cylinders and valving. The  arrangement has two cylinders connected at their rod ends and mounted on a beam,  with limit switches or limit valves, a directional control valve, and four check  valves. As long as compressed air is supplied to the intensifier, it takes in  atmospheric air, compresses it, and sends it to a receiver and/or the  system.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-30" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1330gif_00000056418.gif" height="282" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-30. Typical piping arrangement for air-to-air  intensifier (shown running with air on).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the cylinders in Figure 13-30 stroke to the left, the intensifier takes in  atmospheric air at the cap end of the 3.0-in. bore cylinder. Compressed air  discharges from the rod end to a high-pressure receiver. After the cylinders  fully stroke to the left, a limit valve pilot-shifts the directional control  valve to stroke the cylinders to the right. When the cylinders stroke to the  right, the opposite check valves take in and discharge air. Reciprocation  continues until outlet pressure from the 3.0-in. cylinder reaches approximately  twice the inlet pressure at the 4.0-in. bore cylinder.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;The piping arrangement in Figure 13-30 produces less intensified  air per compressor horsepower than the circuits in Figures 13-31 and 13-32.  Taking in and compressing atmospheric air to a higher pressure gives a minimal  high-pressure volume for each stroke. When compressing a gas, reducing volume by  one half doubles absolute pressure. If the 3-in. bore cylinder has a 6-in.  stroke and intake pressure is 14 psia, then as the cylinder moves through 3 in.  of stroke, pressure climbs to 28 psia. As the 3-in. bore cylinder continues to  stroke, pressure goes to 56 psia 1.5 in. from the end and to 112 psia 0.75 in.  from the end. The cylinder finally starts discharging 160-psia air about 0.625  in. from the end of its stroke. Volume entering the high-pressure receiver is  minimal for each stroke, and continues to decrease as the pressure level  increases. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-31" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1331gif_00000056419.gif" height="211" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-31. Air-saving piping arrangement for air-to-air  intensifier (shown running with air on).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt;  &lt;p align="center"&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Using shop-air pressure in the intensifying cylinder, Figures 13-31 and -32,  greatly reduces this high-pressure/low-flow problem. First, the high-pressure  receiver starts with 80 psig and the air in the intensifying cylinder starts at  94 psia. This circuit discharges intensified air for more than half its stroke,  making it a smaller, more-efficient package.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Notice also, the approximately 2:1 intensification from a 4-in. cylinder  driving a 4-in. cylinder. This is possible because two areas, pressurized by  shop air, push against one area of the intensifier cylinder. The actual  intensification of the unit in Figure 13-31 is 2.06:1 when stroking to the left,  and 1.93:1 when stroking to the right.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="450"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 13-32" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/84133Fig1332gif_00000056420.gif" height="210" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 13-32. Air-saving piping arrangement for air-to-air  intensifier (shown running with air on).&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;For higher pressure use a smaller-bore intensifier cylinder or a larger-bore  driving cylinder. Figure 13-32 depicts a 4-in. bore driving cylinder and a 2-in.  bore intensifier cylinder. This combination increases inlet air pressure about  five times. The actual intensification ratios are 6.33:1 as the cylinders stroke  left, and 4.74:1 as the cylinders stroke right. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;When specifying cylinders to build an air-to-air intensifier, be  careful not exceed their pressure rating. Pre-lubed cylinders are best for this  type of operation because they keep excess lubricator oil out of the  high-pressure circuit. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;As an air-to-air intensifier pumps air to a maximum pressure, the  volume decreases as the pressure increases. It is best to operate the  intensifier to produce a pressure 15 to 20% higher than the system needs, with a  regulator to set the maximum pressure at the work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;!--noad--&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-1618595284903654129?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/1618595284903654129/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_7454.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/1618595284903654129'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/1618595284903654129'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_7454.html' title='الدوائر الهيدروليكيه  المعقده'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-4554042135277814502</id><published>2009-07-08T08:50:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T08:57:38.676-07:00</updated><title type='text'>الدوائر المحرّكة السائلة</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Fluid Motor Circuits&lt;/h2&gt;One way to change fluid energy into useful work is  through air or hydraulic motors. These fluid motors produce rotary power that  can drive conveyors, operate long transfers, power fan blades, run a winch,  drill and tap a hole, and handle many other applications.   &lt;p&gt;Compared to electric motors, quick reversal of rotation or stalling does not  damage a fluid motor. Changing motor speed (within the limits of its  specifications) does not adversely affect torque. Repeated starting and stopping  air or hydraulic motors does not cause damage or overheating. Also, hydraulic  motors commonly operate at low speed without a gear reducer. These features —  along with compact size — make fluid motors the best choice in many  applications. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;To size a fluid motor, calculate torque instead of horsepower.  However, remember that fluid motors have approximately 50% less starting torque  than electric motors of the same horsepower. Make allowance for this reduced  torque if the motor must start under load.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Vane-design air motors are common in low-torque/high-speed applications. For  some high-torque applications, vane motors with integral gear reducers work  well. Piston-type motors are larger and more expensive, but they produce high  torque at low speeds. A less expensive, more-compact gerotor-design air motor  that operates in the lower-speed range also is available.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Air motors operate safely in most environments and save space at  the work site. Air motor efficiency is very low — only in the 15 to 30% range.  Minimizing run time by starting and stopping the motor helps offset low  efficiency in many applications.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Air motor speed varies with load changes. Power level and torque  also vary widely with speed change. Without a good silencer or muffler, air  motors are loud.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="220"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-1" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig121gif_00000056214.gif" height="136" width="220" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;Fig. 12-1. Uni-directional hydraulic motor.&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-2" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig122gif_00000056215.gif" height="229" width="220" /&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-2. Bi-directional hydraulic motor.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Hydraulic motors, on the other hand, can produce speeds from 1 to 5000 rpm.  With proper valving they produce little shock, and their efficiency is in the 80  to 95% range. They also operate safely in most environments and save space at  the work site. They are very rugged. Unlike cylinders with resilient seals,  hydraulic motors always leak or bypass internally. To stop and hold over-running  loads, use a brake or other external device.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="220"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-3" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig123gif_00000056216.gif" height="202" width="220" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-3. Variable-displacement, bi-directional hydraulic  motor.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-4" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig124gif_00000056217.gif" height="200" width="220" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-4. Uni-directional air motor.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-1 and Figure 12-4 show the symbols for a uni-directional hydraulic  and air motor. Figures 12-2, 12-3, and 12-5 show motors designed for  bi-directional operation. Figure 12-3 shows a variable-displacement  bi-directional hydraulic motor symbol.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="220"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig-12-5" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig125gif_00000056218.gif" height="201" width="220" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-5. Bi-directional air motor.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Sizing a hydraulic motor system&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;To size a hydraulic motor system, the following information must be  known:&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;1. Maximum torque required (usually in in.- or ft-lb)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;2. Maximum speed required (usually in revolutions per minute, rpm) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;3. How motor will be stopped (coast, braked, decelerated, other) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;4. Maximum pressure allowed (in psi, arbitrarily decided by the engineer or  designer)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-6" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig126gif_00000056219.gif" height="525" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-6. Bi-directional hydraulic motor at rest with pump  running.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-7" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig127gif_00000056220.gif" height="548" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-7. Bi-directional hydraulic motor running clockwise.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Sample problem – see Figures 12-6 through 12-9&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Maximum torque = 5400 in.-lb Maximum pressure = 3000 psi&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Maximum speed = 220 rpm Motor will coast to a stop&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-8" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig128gif_00000056221.gif" height="458" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-8. Bi-directional hydraulic motor running  counterclockwise.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-9" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig129gif_00000056222.gif" height="536" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-9. Bi-directional hydraulic motor stopping.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998figajpg_00000056185.jpg" height="123" width="500" /&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998figbjpg_00000056186.jpg" height="120" width="500" /&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998figcjpg_00000056187.jpg" height="93" width="500" /&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998figdjpg_00000056188.jpg" height="94" width="500" /&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Sizing an air motor system &lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;To size an air motor system the following information must be  supplied:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="600"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;1.&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Maximum torque required &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Usually in foot-pounds (or horsepower could be substituted)&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;2.&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Maximum speed required &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Usually in revolutions per minute, rpm &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;3.&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;How motor is stopped&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Coast, braked, decelerated, other&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;4. &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Maximum pressure allowed&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Usually 80 to100 psi&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-10" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1210gif_00000056223.gif" height="403" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-10. Bi-directional air motor at rest.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-11" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1211gif_00000056224.gif" height="420" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-11. Bi-directional air motor just starting to  rotate.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Sample problem – see Figures 12-10 through 12-13&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;table border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;1.&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Maximum torque required &lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;10 ft-lb&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;2.&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Maximum speed required&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;150 rpm &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;3.&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;How to stop motor&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Retarded&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;4.&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;Maximum pressure available&lt;/td&gt; &lt;td&gt;90 psi &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998fig2ajpg_00000056191.jpg" height="120" width="500" /&gt;&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;div align="center"&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-12" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1212gif_00000056225.gif" height="403" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-12. Bi-directional air motor running at full  torque.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;div align="center"&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-13" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1213gif_00000056226.gif" height="392" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-13. Bi-directional air motor stopping with  backpressure.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Directional controls for hydraulic motors&lt;/h2&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-14 shows a solenoid-operated control circuit for a small,  uni-directional hydraulic motor. Energizing the solenoid starts and runs the  motor. Deenergizing the solenoid allows the motor to coast to a stop. Depending  on the type and amount of load, starting and stopping the motor may be anywhere  between smooth and abrupt. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-14" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1214gif_00000056227.gif" height="624" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-14. Small hydraulic motor circuit with single direction  of rotation.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-15 shows how to control a large uni-directional hydraulic motor via  a normally open, solenoid-operated relief valve. This circuit is less expensive  than one that uses a large directional valve and a relief valve.  Solenoid-operated relief valves discharge pump flow to tank at about 20 to 50  psi, normally keeping the motor stopped. Energizing the solenoid on the relief  valve causes it to start closing. The closing of the relief valve builds  pressure and the motor starts to turn. If pressure tries to go higher than the  relief setting, this valve stays partially open, which gives the motor time to  accelerate. When the motor is at maximum speed, pressure drops, and the relief  valve closes completely, directing all pump flow to the motor inlet. If the  system pressure tries to go higher than the relief setting, the valve opens to  protect the circuit. De-energizing the solenoid on the relief valve allows the  motor to coast to a stop without cavitation.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-15" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1215gif_00000056228.gif" height="465" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-15. Large hydraulic motor circuit with single direction  of rotation.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Note that if the motor can turn at the low unloading pressure (20 to 50 psi),  it may never stop completely. Use a brake valve at the motor outlet to keep it  from turning if this situation occurs.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-16 shows two hydraulic motors in a parallel circuit. Supplying two  or more motors from a single valve lets the fluid follow the path of least  resistance. Synchronizing the motors with a flow divider (Chapter 11) or by a  mechanical linkage would keep them together. With parallel circuits, all motors  have full torque but only get a portion of pump flow. In other words, the motors  have equal power at reduced speed.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-16" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1216gif_00000056229.gif" height="533" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-16. Parallel hydraulic motor circuit with bi-directional  rotation.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The series circuit in Figure 12-17 has the outlet of the first motor piped to  the inlet of the second. This series circuit gives nearly perfect speed  synchronization, but reduces each motor’s power. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The series circuit works well with hydraulic motors because outlet flow is  almost identical to inlet flow. This near-equal flow provides tolerable  synchronization, but generates backpressure on the inlet and outlet ports of the  leading motor. All hydraulic motors have some internal leakage that normally  goes to the low-pressure or tank-side outlet through internal check valves. With  motors in series, backpressure to run the downstream motors can cause excessive  case pressure that may blow out the shaft seal. Some hydraulic motors are  available with high-pressure seals that eliminate the blowout problem. Another  option is to select motors with external case drains (as shown in the Figure)  that allow leakage oil to return to tank at little or no backpressure. When  external case drains, remember that leakage in the leading motors will cause the  downstream motors to run more slowly.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-17" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1217gif_00000056230.gif" height="518" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-17. Series hydraulic motor circuit with bi-directional  rotation.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;All of these circuits show open-centered valves for smooth stopping or  coasting of the motors. This works well if the motor has little or no tendency  to coast or if coasting is allowable. Next, we’ll look at some circuits for  rapidly and smoothly stopping hydraulic motors with over-running loads.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Circuits for hydraulic motors with over-running loads&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 12-18 depicts the most common way to slow a hydraulic motor  with an over-running load. Notice that the directional valve has blocked  ports&lt;em&gt; A&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;. This valve’s center condition makes a motor  stop abruptly, which could cause high shock and physical damage. Shock occurs  because the motor becomes a fixed-displacement pump without a relief valve to  protect it from over pressure. The cross-port relief valve shown in the Figure  allows fluid from the over-pressured port to go to the opposite motor port. The  reason for piping the outlet of the reliefs to the opposite motor port is to  keep it from cavitating as the motor decelerates. Cross-port reliefs are  available with both relief valves in a common housing to save piping time and  reduce potential leakage points.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-18" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1218gif_00000056198.gif" height="665" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-18. Dual cross-port relief valves.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Set the pressure for the cross-port relief valve the same or higher than  system pressure. This gives full starting torque and smooth controlled stopping.  When the cross-port relief valve pressure setting is lower than system pressure,  it reduces starting and maximum running torque. The only reason for a lower  setting at the cross-port reliefs is for longer coasting time. The higher the  pressure setting of the cross-port reliefs, the more quickly the motor stops.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;By deenergizing the directional valve with the motor at full speed, outlet  flow from the motor is blocked and pressure increases. When pressure reaches the  setting of the cross-port relief valve, the valve opens and allows flow to the  opposite motor port. Backpressure equal to or greater than what it took to start  the motor now holds back against the load. The energy of the over-running load  dissipates over a short period of time to eliminate shock.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-19" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1219gif_00000056199.gif" height="644" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-19. Single cross-port relief valve with check  valves.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Dual cross-port relief valves allow different stopping times for the two  directions of rotation. If this feature is not required, use the single relief  and check valves shown in Figure 12-19. With this circuit, pressure is set only  once for both directions of rotation. Notice that the check valves direct flow  through the relief from either motor port to the opposite motor port. This check  valve arrangement is available in a manifold to save piping time.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-20" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1220gif_00000056200.gif" height="677" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-20. Sequence valve for cross-port relief.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-20 shows an externally piloted and drained pressure control valve  that slows the motor in both directions. A shuttle valve feeds the pilot port  from either motor port to open the pressure control valve. The external drain  line allows internal leakage to return to tank. As Figure 12-20 indicates, the  pressure control must be set equal to or higher than the system pressure. For  longer stopping times, use the piping arrangement in Figure 12-21.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-21" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1221gif_00000056231.gif" height="628" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-21. Externally piloted and drained sequence valve for  cross-port relief.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;In Figure 12-21, the drain line from the pressure-control valve is piped to  the pump line of the directional valve. With the drain line piped this way, the  setting of the pressure control is unimportant when the motor is running.  Working pressure at the drain port of the pressure control valve adds to the set  pressure. Shifting the directional valve keeps the cross-port relief valve from  opening when the motor is running.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;When the directional valve shifts to its center position, pump  flow dumps to tank and the drain line pressure drops, allowing the cross-port  relief to operate. This provides pressure lower than system pressure at the  cross-port relief valve, so the over-running load takes longer to stop.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Brake valves to control hydraulic motors with over-running loads&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-22 depicts brake valves (sometimes called over-center valves) piped  in the lines between the motor and the directional valve. To control the motor  in both directions of rotation, install two brake valves as shown.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-22" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1222gif_00000056232.gif" height="513" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-22. Internally and externally piloted brake valve – at  rest with pump running.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;A brake valve is an internally and externally pilot-operated pressure-control  valve. The internal pilot works on a small area and thus requires a high pilot  pressure. The external pilot works on a larger area at a much lower pilot  pressure. A common ratio for pilot areas is 8:1. With an 8:1 pilot-area  difference, the valve allows fluid to pass when the internal pilot pressure is  1000 psi or the external pilot pressure is 125 psi. Always note the internal  pilot pressure setting on the schematic diagram. The internal pilot setting  indicates the amount of backpressure at the motor during deceleration. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Brake valve pressure setting is independent of system pressure.  This means a lower or higher pressure on the brake valve does not affect the  system’s maximum operating pressure. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Brake valves are necessary when a hydraulic motor’s load tries to  make it go faster than the pump or control circuit feeds it. In a winch  application, a directional valve shifts to lower a load. Without a brake valve,  the winch load falls freely, the motor cavitates, and the circuit is unsafe.  Most winch applications require only one brake valve.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-22 shows a brake-valve circuit at rest. The brake valves stay  closed because their pressure settings are high enough to stop the load. Notice  the internal pilot lines on each brake valve that sense pressure in the motor  outlet lines. Also, each brake valve has an external pilot line from the  opposite motor flow line. Bypass check valves in each brake valve allow  free-flow return during reverse flow. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;NOTE: Never depend on any valves to stop and hold a hydraulic  motor. Hydraulic motors always have internal leakage and will continue to turn  slowly without some external braking arrangement. Spring-on, pilot-to-release,  multiple-disk brakes are one method of holding a hydraulic motor stationary.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-23 shows the brake-valve circuit after shifting the directional  valve. Oil entering the left motor port must be at least 112 psi (1/8 of the  900-psi setting) to open the right brake valve. When the load is over-running,  inlet pressure to the motor stays at 112 psi to hold the outlet brake valve  open. When pressure at the inlet drops below 112 psi, the opposite brake valve  closes to retard motor movement. During this portion of the cycle, backpressure  keeps the motor from running away. When pressure tries to go above 112 psi, the  opposite brake valve opens wide -- dropping all backpressure. As the motor is  turning under power, the external pilot supply controls the brake valve.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-23" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1223gif_00000056233.gif" height="452" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-23. Internally and externally piloted brake valve – with  hydraulic motor running.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When the directional valve centers, as depicted in Figure 12-24, external  pilot supply to the brake valve drops. The brake valve tries to close, causing  pressure to increase at the motor outlet port. When outlet pressure reaches 900  psi, it forces the brake valve open and holds back against the over-running  load. Because 900 psi is more than enough to stop the load, the motor  decelerates to a smooth controlled stop.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-24" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1224gif_00000056234.gif" height="487" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-24. Internally and externally piloted brake valve – with  hydraulic motor stopped.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The brake valve only holds the motor back if it is trying to run away. This  means little or no energy loss as the motor turns under load — and no running  away when the load tries to turn the motor. This action is identical to that of  a counterbalance circuit for a cylinder. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Because each brake valve is independent, a different pressure setting at each  valve is possible.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Controlling the speed of hydraulic motors&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;When flow controls set the speed of a hydraulic motor, the result is nearly  the same as with a cylinder. The main difference is that cylinders normally have  positive seals while motors always have internal leakage. With meter-in and  bleed-off circuits, internal leakage causes motor speed to fluctuation as  pressure varies.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 12-25 shows a motor circuit with meter-in flow controls. This is the  preferred way to control the speed of hydraulic motors. Use a meter-in circuit  whenever possible because the motor's internal leakage passes to the  low-pressure port through internal check valves. This type circuit makes a case  drain or high-pressure shaft seal unnecessary. There is little or no  backpressure at the outlet of the motor to cause high pressure at the shaft  seal. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-25" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1225gif_00000056205.gif" height="545" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-25. Meter-in flow-control circuit for a hydraulic  motor.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When supplied with 3 gpm at 100 psi, the motor turns at low torque. Its speed  is approximately 200 rpm. When the motor load increases and pressure drop across  it climbs, increased internal leakage causes speed to slow by as much as 10 to  30%. (The lower the efficiency of the motor, the greater the change in speed.)  Motors that turn very slowly may even stop as pressure drop increases.  Fast-turning motors may lose speed but continue rotating. As discussed in the  section on flow controls, a pressure-compensated valve keeps a constant flow to  the motor but cannot offset its internal leakage.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-26" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1226gif_00000056206.gif" height="509" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-26. Bleed-off (or bypass) flow-control circuit for a  hydraulic motor.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The bleed-off circuit shown in Figure 12-26 is even less effective than the  meter-in circuit. With bleed-off flow control, the motor inefficiency combines  with the pump inefficiency to produce an even greater loss of rotational speed  as the motor loads. The circuit shows a pressure-compensated flow control  bypassing 7 gpm. The motor operates at 3 gpm and 100 psi. As the motor loads and  pressure increases, internal leakage in the motor and pump results in a greater  drop in speed than with the meter-in circuit. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-27" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1227gif_00000056207.gif" height="535" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-27. Meter-out flow-control circuit with an external  drain.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The meter-out circuit shown in Figure 12-27 provides the most accurate speed  control. Note that heat generation is high, even with a pressure-compensated  pump, but the resulting speed control is very accurate. Use pressure-compensated  flow controls and motors with external case drains for the greatest accuracy and  longest motor life. Oil enters the motor at low torque and the pressure drop  across it is low. Even though high inlet pressure with high backpressure causes  high internal leakage, pump input makes up for it. Accurately controlled fluid  leaving the motor keeps speed constant because the pressure-compensated flow  control maintains a steady flow. When the motor loads, pressure drop across it  decreases. Internal leakage decreases but the amount of oil leaving the outlet  port stays constant. As long as outlet flow does not change, speed stays the  same.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-28" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1228gif_00000056208.gif" height="549" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-28. Meter-in flow-control circuit with a  servo-controlled variable-displacement pump.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The circuit in Figure 12-28 generates only minimum heat, but speed fluctuates  with load changes when using a variable-displacement pump. The only energy loss  is from the inefficiency of the pump, valve, and motor. As the load increases,  pressure at the motor inlet climbs. The increased pressure causes greater slip  at the pump and motor, so motor speed slows. As shown in the Figure, a  servo-controlled pump with electronic feedback from the hydraulic motor  eliminates the speed change problem and gives extremely accurate speed  control.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Simple torque limiter for air motors&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Some circuits reduce the inlet pressure to limit air motor torque on a  device. Reducing inlet pressure causes the motor to stall when the workload  exceeds its torque. Limiting torque with this method is not reliable or  repeatable. Torque levels vary by as much as 10 to 20% according to how fast the  motor turns, the mass involved, and the pressure required. The faster the motor  turns and the heavier the part being turned, the more the torque overrides.  Adjusting inlet pressure reduces motor torque but will not overcome the  variations that weight and speed cause. Also, adjusting inlet pressure to a very  low level makes motor performance erratic, with an ever-changing torque.  Finally, at lower pressures, reduced speed may increase cycle time.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-29" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1229gif_00000056235.gif" height="296" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-29. Simple unidirectional torque limiter for an air  motor.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To overcome these problems, try the diagrammed circuit and simplified  mechanical layout shown in Figure 12-29. With this circuit, the motor operates  at full torque, while meter-in flow controls set its maximum speed. An  adjustable spring force holds the motor in position by opposing its torque  reaction. As the motor turns to tighten a device, torque is low until near the  end of the operation. During this part of the cycle, the adjustable spring  resists motor torque, keeping its housing stationary. When motor torque  increases to match the amount set by the spring tension, the housing starts to  rotate. When torque reaches spring setting, the motor housing moves the reaction  arm against the limit switch, shifting the directional valve to center and  stopping the motor. This mechanism — designed with minimal friction or binding —  gives reliable and repeatable results. Air limit valves or electric limit  switches work equally well with this arrangement. Use air limits with snap  action shifting for good repeatability. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Hydraulic motor driven by a bi-directional pump&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 12-30 shows a variable-displacement bi-directional pump  driving a bi-directional hydraulic motor in a closed-loop system. This circuit  is commonly known as a hydrostatic transmission. The bi-directional hydraulic  pump can produce up to full flow from either port, eliminating the need for  directional or flow control valves. When the pump strokes to produce flow from  one port, the motor starts turning a given direction. With controlled pump  stroking, the motor starts and accelerates smoothly. The amount of pump stroke  controls motor rpm and pressure is just enough to make the motor turn. With  high-efficiency components, this system generates little heat, eliminating the  need for large reservoirs while it gives infinitely variable speed and torque.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-30" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1230gif_00000056236.gif" height="175" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-30. Bidirectional hydraulic motor driven by a  bidirectional pump (shown with motor at rest and pump running).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Due to internal leakage of the pump and motor, the circuit is not a true  closed loop. Without leakage makeup, the circuit would quickly run dry, operate  intermittently, and damage its parts. To keep the closed loop full,  fixed-displacement charge pump &lt;em&gt;A&lt;/em&gt; supplies flow through check valves  &lt;em&gt;C1&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;C2&lt;/em&gt; to the low-pressure side of the circuit. Charge oil  keeps the pump inlet fully supplied, preventing cavitation. When the motor  stops, excess oil from the charge pump goes to tank through relief valve  &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;. Oil from the charge pump often operates the pump stroking mechanism,  plus other circuits on the machine.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;In Figure 12-31, the motor is running forward. Flow from the pump  goes to the motor inlet, making it turn. Flow from the motor outlet returns to  the opposite side of the pump. Check valve &lt;em&gt;C1&lt;/em&gt; stays closed (due to the  working pressure) while check valve &lt;em&gt;C2&lt;/em&gt; opens to allow charge oil to  make up for leakage and supply the closed-loop with cooled clean fluid. Shuttle  valve &lt;em&gt;E&lt;/em&gt; shifts when the motor runs, porting excess charge fluid through  relief valve &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt;, the motor case, the pump case, and back to tank. Charge  flow sends spent oil through the motor and pump case to cool them, then through  a heat exchanger to remove excess heat. Flow goes through relief valve  &lt;em&gt;D&lt;/em&gt; because its setting is 100 psi less than relief valve &lt;em&gt;B&lt;/em&gt;.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-31" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1231gif_00000056237.gif" height="176" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-31. Bidirectional hydraulic motor driven by a  bidirectional pump (shown with motor running forward).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;While the motor runs, speed is infinitely variable and system pressure  fluctuates with any load changes. The only heat generation in this circuit comes  from the charge pump going across the relief valve, plus inefficiencies in the  pump, motor, and valves.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;When the motor meets a load large enough to stall it, relief valve  &lt;em&gt;F1&lt;/em&gt; opens as shown in Figure 12-32. This directs pump flow around the  stalled motor, protecting the system from overpressure. If relief valve  &lt;em&gt;F1&lt;/em&gt; stays open for any length of time, the wasted energy quickly  over-heats the closed-loop piping. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="400"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 12-32" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83998Fig1232gif_00000056238.gif" height="176" width="400" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Fig. 12-32. Bidirectional hydraulic motor driven by a  bidirectional pump (shown with motor stalled).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Relief valves &lt;em&gt;F1&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;F2&lt;/em&gt; also protect the motor when the  pump goes to zero stroke and an external force continues to drive the motor.  When an external force drives a motor, the motor becomes a pump. Pressure at its  outlet climbs until it reaches 5000 psi. At 5000 psi, one of the relief valves  opens, allowing oil to flow to the opposite motor port. This protects the motor  and circuit from excess pressure and possible cavitation. While the externally  driven motor bypasses, relief valve backpressure decelerates it, stopping the  load quickly and smoothly. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Closed-loop motor circuits give infinitely variable control of  torque and speed with minimal shock and heat generation.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;!--noad--&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/3683690478029615107-4554042135277814502?l=shadi725.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/feeds/4554042135277814502/comments/default' title='تعليقات الرسالة'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_3811.html#comment-form' title='0 تعليقات'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/4554042135277814502'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/3683690478029615107/posts/default/4554042135277814502'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://shadi725.blogspot.com/2009/07/blog-post_3811.html' title='الدوائر المحرّكة السائلة'/><author><name>SHADI</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/11617922445916074994</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='http://img2.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-3683690478029615107.post-6421580535019626914</id><published>2009-07-08T08:46:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2009-07-08T08:49:37.582-07:00</updated><title type='text'>دوائر مقسمِ تدفقِ</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir="rtl" style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;span style="clear: right;"&gt; &lt;h3&gt;Flow Divider Circuits&lt;/h3&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;When it is necessary to split a single hydraulic line into two or  more identical flow paths, a tee or several tees can be the first solution.  However, if the resistance in all the branches is not identical, flow can vary  greatly in each path. Adding flow controls at the tee outlets makes it possible  to change resistance and equalize flow in each branch, but as the machine  operates, work resistance changes often require constant flow modifications. A  device called a &lt;em&gt;flow divider&lt;/em&gt; splits flow and compensates for pressure  differences in most cases. A flow divider can split flow equally, unequally, and  into more than two paths. One design maintains a constant flow for one outlet  and directs any excess flow to a second outlet.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="278"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-1" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig111gif_00000055753.gif" height="223" width="276" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-1. ISO symbol for flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 11-1 pictures the ISO symbol for a flow-dividing valve.  While the ISO symbol shows the function of the valve, it does not indicate which  design it is. Fluid entering the flow divider splits and passes to both outlets  equally. Figure 11-2 shows the symbol for a spool-type flow-divider and gives a  better indication of the valve’s operation. Note that a spool-type flow divider  will not allow reverse flow. When using a spool-type flow divider to synchronize  cylinders, add check valves to pass reverse flow. However, when the cylinders  reverse, there is no synchronization with a spool-type flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="239"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-2" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig112gif_00000055754.gif" height="148" width="237" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-2. Spool-type flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 11-3 shows a divider/combiner that synchronizes actuators in both  directions of travel. It splits pump flow to the actuators and also assures that  equal reverse flow returns from both cylinder ports.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="246"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-3" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig113gif_00000055755.gif" height="156" width="244" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-3. Spool-type flow divider and combiner.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 11-4 pictures a flow divider with bypass relief valves that  allow a lagging cylinder to complete its stroke. Reverse-flow check valves allow  free flow around the divider spool while the actuator returns.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-4" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig114gif_00000055756.gif" height="116" width="248" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-4. Spool-type flow divider with bypass reliefs and  check valves.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 11-5 and 11-6 show a priority flow-divider symbol. Port &lt;em&gt;CF&lt;/em&gt;  (controlled flow) of this flow divider always has the same flow when the pump is  producing that flow or more. Excess pump flow goes through port &lt;em&gt;EF&lt;/em&gt;  (excess flow) to tank — or to another circuit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="258"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;div align="center"&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-5" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig115gif_00000055757.gif" height="125" width="244" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-5. Fixed-flow spool-type priority flow  divider.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-6" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig116gif_00000055758.gif" height="117" width="256" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-6. Variable spool-type priority flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 11-7 and 11-8 show motor-type flow-divider symbols (as drawn by the  manufacturers). This type flow divider is more efficient in most circuits.  Motor-type flow dividers also work well in flow- and/or pressure-intensification  circuits. They are available with multiple outlet ports and/or unequal  flows.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="236"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;div align="center"&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-7" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig117gif_00000055759.gif" height="185" width="234" /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-7. Motor-type flow divider.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-8" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig118gif_00000055760.gif" height="172" width="258" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-8. Unequal, triple-outlet motor-type flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Spool-type flow dividers&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Spool-type flow dividers split flow through pressure-compensated fixed  orifices. The pressure-compensation feature ensures near-equal flow through the  orifices — even when inlet and/or outlet pressures fluctuate. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Spool-type flow dividers can split flow equally or unequally, according to  the orifice sizes. Always use spool-type flow dividers at or near their rated  flow. Because most designs use fixed orifices, equality of flow is poor when  used below their rated flow. If flow exceeds the rating of the valve, high  pressure drop causes poor performance and fluid heating.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;The dividing accuracy of spool-type flow dividers can be as close as ±5%,  depending on the pressure difference at the outlet ports.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 11-9 shows a spool-type flow divider splitting pump flow equally. With  this circuit, flow to each directional valve is nearly equal, even with one  cylinder working at high pressure while the other cylinder is at low pressure or  stopped by a centered valve. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="365"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-9" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig119gif_00000055761.gif" height="324" width="363" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-9. Spool-type flow divider piped to split pump flow.  (Shown at rest with pump running.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;In Figure 11-10, fluid from port 1 flows to tank through the directional  valve while fluid from port 2 drives a cylinder. Pressure at port 1 is 0 psi  while pressure at port 2 is 1500 psi. Under these conditions, pressure at the  flow divider inlet also is 1500 psi. Pressure at the inlet of a spool-type flow  divider is always equal to the highest-pressure outlet. This condition generates  a lot of heat because pressurized oil leaving port 1 is not doing work. It is  best to use a spool-type flow divider in circuits where both outlet ports are at  or near the same pressure. The higher the pressure variation, the greater the  energy wasted as heat with spool-type flow dividers. When outlet pressures  continuously vary by more than 300 to 500 psi, it is best to use a motor-type  flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="382"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-10" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1110gif_00000055762.gif" height="320" width="380" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-10. Spool-type flow divider piped to split pump flow.  (Shown with right-hand cylinder extending.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When splitting flow into more than two paths, add another spool-type flow  divider to each outlet of the first divider. Figure 11-11 shows a synchronizing  circuit for four unidirectional hydraulic motors. Flow split equally by the  first spool-type flow divider goes to two more spool-type flow dividers. The  second pair of spool-type flow dividers split the half flow from the first  spool-type flow divider, and sends equal flow to the four motors. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="424"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-11" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1111gif_00000055763.gif" height="317" width="422" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-11. Spool-type flow divider piped to split pump flow  into four equal parts (Shown with pump running.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;When using spool-type flow dividers for equal flow, the total number of  dividers must be an odd number. If used in any even combination, flow will not  be equal from all outlets -- unless the first divider has unequal flow from its  outlets. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;To get three equal outputs with spool-type flow dividers use one  with unequal outputs, say 33.3% and 66.7%. Send flow from the 33.3% side to  power the first actuator. Send flow from the 66.7% side to an equal-flow  divider. Flows from the equal flow divider outlets is now 33.3% of total pump  flow, so all three outputs are the same.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Notice that these circuits cannot handle reverse flow. Reverse  flow through a spool-type flow divider will lock up one actuator when return  pressure differs at the outlet ports.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Also notice that each outlet of a flow divider can have a different pressure.  Figure 11-9 shows outlet 1 with a relief valve set at 1500 psi, and outlet 2 set  at 2000 psi. (If both cylinders operate at the same pressure, substitute a  single relief valve at the pump.) However, if both cylinders are moving and one  of them stalls at 2000 psi, both cylinders will stop. The relief valve  arrangement in Figure 11-11 allows any motor needing more than 2000 psi to stop  while all other motors continue turning.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Spool-type flow divider/combiners&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Spool-type flow dividers only allow flow in one direction. From the symbol in  Figure 11-2, it is plain that reverse flow would lock up one of the cylinders.  The cylinder that needs less resistance actually gets more. In a circuit where  flow must go both ways, use a check valve to bypass the flow divider. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="452"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-12" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1112gif_00000055764.gif" height="263" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-12. Spool-type flow divider arranged to synchronize  two cylinders.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 11-12 shows spool-type flow dividers in a circuit that synchronizes  two cylinders. As the cylinders extend, the flow divider splits the flow and  cylinder speed is nearly the same. When the cylinders retract, bypass check  valves allow fluid to go around the divider. There is no synchronization from  the cap-end flow divider at this time. A second flow divider with bypass check  valves on the rod-end ports (as shown) is necessary for identical movement while  retracting. As depicted in Figure 11-4, some flow dividers come with integral  bypass check valves. Integral bypass check valves save piping time, have fewer  leaks, and are more compact. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Because flow dividers are not 100% accurate, one of the cylinders may lag.  Because there is internal leakage past the spool, any flow divider will let the  lagging cylinder continue its travel. Because of the bypass leakage, the speed  of the lagging cylinder while it is going to the end of its stroke is very slow.  Integral relief valves (as shown in Figure 11-4) allow the lagging cylinder to  catch up quickly. Set these relief valves between 50 and 150 psi. Once the  pressure difference across the valve reaches this pressure range, fluid bypasses  the restricted spool to quickly re-phase the cylinders.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In Figure 11-13, a single flow divider/combiner synchronizes cylinders in  both directions of travel&lt;strong&gt;.&lt;/strong&gt; Here a flow divider/combiner  replaces the flow divider and check valves in Figure 11-12. Because there is no  ANSI symbol for the flow divider/combiner, add bi-directional arrows to the  one-way flow-divider symbol. This more-detailed symbol helps to clarify the  valve’s action. Bi-directional arrows show the divider/combiner function. These  detailed symbols come from manufacturers’ catalogs and represent their  interpretation of their valve’s function.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="452"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-13" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1113gif_00000055765.gif" height="281" width="450" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-13. Spool-type flow divider/combiner arranged to  synchronize two cylinders.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;As the cylinders extend, the divider/combiner splits the flow to  keep cylinder speeds nearly the same. When the cylinders retract, the  divider/combiner shifts internally and equalizes return flow also.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;A flow divider/combiner wastes energy the same as a standard flow  divider. In essence these devices are infinitely variable pressure-compensated  flow control pairs. Any flow control will cause heat because it is a  restriction. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Flow dividers or flow divider/combiners are not designed to control  running-away loads. For the circuits in Figures 11-12 and 11-13, a  counterbalance valve in the line between the directional valve and the flow  divider may be necessary if the loads can run away.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Spool-type priority flow dividers&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 11-14 shows a typical spool-type priority flow divider circuit. A  priority flow divider maintains constant flow from the controlled flow  (&lt;em&gt;CF&lt;/em&gt;) port. Any additional flow passes out the excess flow (&lt;em&gt;EF&lt;/em&gt;)  port. The non-standard symbol in the Figure is one typically found in  manufacturers’ catalogs. The controlled flow may be fixed or adjustable,  according to the circuit needs. The excess flow may be sent to tank or to  another circuit as required. (When there is pressure at the excess flow port,  make sure the valve design can handle it.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="422"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-14" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1114gif_00000055766.gif" height="337" width="420" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-14. Typical lift-truck circuit using spool-type  priority flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Some priority flow dividers are more like 3-port flow controls and  cannot stand backpressure at the &lt;em&gt;EF&lt;/em&gt; port. Use these flow dividers for  bleed-off flow controlling only. With a bleed-off type priority flow divider,  pressure at &lt;em&gt;EF&lt;/em&gt; port causes flow at the &lt;em&gt;CF&lt;/em&gt; port to  fluctuate.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;In Figure 11-14, a fixed-orifice priority flow divider is used on  a vehicle with power steering and hydraulic actuators. This is the standard  circuit for a forklift truck using a fixed-volume pump. The power-steering  circuit needs 7 gpm and pump flow at idle is a minimum of 10 gpm. The actuators  need as much as 15 gpm for maximum speed.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;When the vehicle is operating, the power steering circuit will  always have at least 7 gpm. When the mast or tilt cylinders need fluid, excess  pump flow operates them. Because there is little excess flow at idle, the mast  and tilt cylinder's speeds are slow at this time.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;The circuit in Figures 11-15 and 11-16 controls the speed of a  hydraulic cylinder powered by a fixed-volume pump. The adjustable  controlled-flow port of the priority flow divider connects to the cylinder  valve, with the excess-flow port piped to tank. This arrangement controls  cylinder speed and keeps heat build up low because the pressure in this circuit  is only slightly higher than the cylinder needs. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="337"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-15" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1115gif_00000055767.gif" height="350" width="335" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-15. Spool-type priority flow divider arranged to  bleed-off excess flow to tank. (Shown with pump running.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Most priority flow dividers are pressure compensating so the  priority flow remains constant even when pressure changes occur. As long as  there is enough pump output, the controlled flow is constant. Excess flow  changes as pump volume varies.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="334"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-16" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1116gif_00000055768.gif" height="355" width="332" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-16. Spool-type priority flow divider arranged to  bleed-off excess flow to tank. (Shown with cylinder extending.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;A priority flow divider wastes energy just like any spool-type  divider. The inlet pressure to the divider is the same as the highest outlet  pressure. When either outlet port is pressurized, the port with little or no  pressure is wasting energy and generating heat.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Motor-type flow dividers&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Motor-type flow dividers consist of two or more hydraulic motors in a common  housing. All the motors share a common shaft, so they all turn at the same  speed. All motors have a common inlet but separate outlets. If the motors have  the same displacement, the output from each motor is nearly equal. (Some  motor-type flow dividers use motors with different displacements, so each  section’s output differs.) The big advantage of a motor-type flow divider over a  spool-type flow divider is energy transfer between sections. A spool-type flow  divider's inlet pressure is always equal to the highest outlet pressure. This  means heat generation from the lower or 0 pressure outlets, because pressurized  fluid goes to tank without doing any work. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In contrast, a motor-type flow divider’s inlet pressure is the average of the  sum of the outlet pressures. Because there is a mechanical link between  sections, excess energy transfer via this link greatly reduces heat generation.  Because hydraulic motors are not 100% efficient, there still is some energy loss  and heat generation in any motor-type flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;Another advantage of motor-type flow dividers is their outlet options. A  spool-type flow divider has only two outlets; a motor-type flow divider can have  many outlets — in even or odd numbers. Most manufacturers catalog units with 6  to 8 outlets, but also will custom-build dividers to suit.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="324"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-17" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1117gif_00000055769.gif" height="284" width="320" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-17. Motor-type flow divider piped to split pump flow.  (Shown at rest with pump running.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 11-17 shows a motor-type flow divider splitting flow from a  fixed-volume pump to separate actuators. With the cylinders at rest, all flow  goes to tank through the tandem-center valves with minimal energy loss. To  stroke the cylinder on the right, shift its directional valve as in Figure  11-18. Flow from the right-hand section of the motor-type flow divider sends  half of the pump’s flow to the right-hand cylinder at 1500 psi. The other half  of the pump’s flow goes to tank through the left valve at 0 pressure. Notice  that pump pressure is approximately 750 psi instead of 1500 psi as in Figure  11-10. Pump pressure is low because most of the energy in the flow divider  outlet going to tank mechanically transfers from the idling motor to the working  motor. Whether one or both cylinders do work, energy going in is always equal to  energy needed plus inefficiencies. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="324"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-18" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1118gif_00000055770.gif" height="268" width="322" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-18. Motor-type flow divider piped to split pump flow.  (Shown with right-hand cylinder extending.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;The 4-outlet motor-type flow divider in Figure 11-19 supplies four hydraulic  motors. Because each motor has a different load, pressure at the motor inlets is  not the same. To figure the approximate inlet pressure to the flow divider, add  the outlet pressures and divide by the number of outlets. (1100 psi + 700 psi +  1250 psi + 1500 psi = 4550 psi. Divide by four outlets and 1138 psi is the  pressure at the pump outlet). The 1138-psi figure is approximate due to losses  in piping and the motors of the flow divider.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="428"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-19" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1119gif_00000055771.gif" height="318" width="420" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-19. Motor-type flow divider piped to split pump flow  into four equal parts. (Shown with pump running).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Notice the relief valve at the flow divider outlets. Because a motor-type  flow divider also acts as an intensifier (See Figures 11-45 through 11-48), it  is necessary to limit the pressure at each outlet. If each motor needs a  different pressure, use separate relief valves at each flow divider outlet. In  Figure 11-19, a set of check valves and a single relief valve sets the same  pressure for each motor — and protects them from overpressure. Because the  relief valve is solenoid-operated it also starts and stops all motors  simultaneously.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Motor-type flow divider synchronizing two cylinders&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Motor-type flow dividers work well for synchronizing actuators. Figure 11-20  shows two cylinders synchronized by a double equal-outlet, motor-type flow  divider. Install the flow divider between the valve and the cylinder cap-end  ports as shown. This arrangement synchronizes the extension stroke of the  cylinders and provides some control for the retraction stroke (See Figures 11-22  and 11-23). Use a second flow divider at the rod-end ports for precise control  on the retraction stroke when required.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="250"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-20" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1120gif_00000055772.gif" height="257" width="248" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-20. Motor-type flow divider piped to synchronize two  cylinders. (Shown at rest with pump running.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;As the cylinders extend, as in Figure 11-21, the flow divider splits pump  flow, causing the actuators to extend at the same time. If the cylinders’ loads  require different pressures, the flow divider still sends almost equal flow to  each port. A motor-type flow divider has some internal bypass, causing the  section with the higher outlet pressure to pass less than half flow. Therefore,  use motor-type flow dividers for circuits needing only nominal synchronization.  With any type of hydraulically controlled synchronization, always take the  cylinders to a fixed position at one or both ends of the stroke.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="248"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-21" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1121gif_00000055773.gif" height="296" width="246" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-21. Motor-type flow divider piped to synchronize two  cylinders. (Shown with cylinders extending.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Also, if pressure intensification above any of the system’s component ratings  is possible, put a relief valve at the flow divider outlets. Several  manufacturers supply their flow dividers with integral bypass relief valves. Set  these reliefs for a safe pressure differential so intensification will not  damage the cylinder. When a bypass relief valve starts relieving, the cylinder  on that side stops while the opposite cylinder’s speed doubles. (If integral  relief valves are not available, install external reliefs when there is a chance  for actuator damage from high pressures.) &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Some manufacturers pipe the integral relief valve’s outlet to tank  instead of back to the flow divider inlet. This type of relief valve circuit  dumps fluid to tank at a pressure low enough to keep from damaging the actuator.  Using a relief valve with its outlet piped to tank causes one actuator to stop  and allows the other one to continue at the same speed.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="249"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-22" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1122gif_00000055774.gif" height="297" width="247" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-22. Motor-type flow divider piped to synchronize two  cylinders. (Shown with cylinders retracting.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 11-22 shows how the cylinders retract under normal conditions. Flow  from the pump goes to both rod-end ports and the cylinders retract together. The  flow divider combines the oil from the cap-end ports and synchronization  continues. However, if one cylinder binds on the retract stroke, the cylinder  with less drag will run away.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="285"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-23" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1123gif_00000055775.gif" height="348" width="283" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-23. Motor-type flow divider piped to synchronize two  cylinders. (Left-hand cylinder shown binding.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figure 11-23 depicts what happens when a cylinder binds. All flow from the  pump goes to the right-hand cylinder — retracting it at double speed. The  right-hand motor of the flow divider turns rapidly due to the high flow. The  left-hand motor of the flow divider also turns rapidly, but no oil passes  through it. The left-hand motor cavitates due to this lack of fluid. After the  right-hand cylinder bottoms out, pressure buildup may cause the left-hand  cylinder to retract. As the left-hand cylinder retracts, the right-hand motor of  the flow divider cavitates.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;If the cylinders in a circuit have different return-force requirements, or  are subject to binding, add a second motor-type flow divider at the cylinders’  rod-end ports. The second flow divider assures that the cylinders are  synchronized on their retraction strokes also. (See Chapter 22, covering  Synchronizing Circuits, for other ways to make actuators move at the same  rate.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Motor-type flow divider in a priority circuit&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Using a motor-type flow divider in a priority circuit like the one shown in  Figure 11-16 will give unsatisfactory results. A spool-type priority flow  divider sends a constant flow to one outlet as long as the pump produces at  least that much flow. When pump flow increases, priority flow stays the same  while the other outlet’s flow starts or increases. Flow from the priority outlet  stays constant through the entire pump range.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="426"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-24" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1124gif_00000055776.gif" height="308" width="424" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-24. Motor-type priority flow divider in lift-truck  circuit. (Shown with engine idling.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 11-24 and 11-25 show what happens when using a motor-type flow  divider in place of a spool-type priority flow divider. With the engine at idle  speed, 3 gpm flows to the power steering and 7 gpm to the cylinder circuit. This  circuit works well at idle — if 3 gpm is enough for the power steering. Figure  11-25 indicates what happens when engine rpm and flow increase. As pump flow  increases, both the power steering and the cylinder circuits receive more fluid  in the same ratio. This overspeeds the power steering while robbing oil from the  cylinder circuit. (There would be little or no heat generation from this  circuit, but the end result is less than satisfactory.) Motor-type flow dividers  with unequal flow outlets are available in various combinations and multiple  flow paths. However, the flow from each outlet changes proportionately as the  inlet flow changes. This feature makes them hard to adapt to the engine-driven  pumps on much off-road equipment.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="426"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-25" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1125gif_00000055777.gif" height="304" width="424" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-25. Motor-type priority flow divider in lift-truck  circuit. (Shown with engine speed increased.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Motor-type flow divider speed control&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;There are ways to use a fixed-volume pump and motor-type flow  dividers to change speeds with minimal heat generation. Figures 11-26 through  11-33 depict some of these. These circuits only give fixed preset speeds without  changing hardware. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="242"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-26" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1126gif_00000055778.gif" height="305" width="240" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-26. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder extending at slow  speed).&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 11-26 shows a 3-speed flow control circuit using a  motor-type flow divider. Here the cylinder is extending slow speed. With the  circuit set up as shown, it defaults to slow speed. Notice there are no flow  controls. To split pump flow evenly and reduce energy loss, use a motor-type  flow divider at its outlet. Each outlet of the flow divider will put out about 3  gpm. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;In Figure 11-26 the cylinder is getting 3 gpm of oil and requires a pressure  of 300 psi to move. Note that the pump pressure is only 100 psi. This happens  because the flow divider is taking in 9 gpm and using 3 gpm to do work. The  other two 3-gpm flows are going back to tank at 0 psi. While it appears these  two 3-gpm flows waste energy, they are actually transferring their energy  through the common to the left-hand motor. The left-hand motor becomes a pump  with a 100-psi inlet and two motors driving it to 300 psi. As always in  flow-divider circuits, the average of the sum of the outlets will be the inlet  pressure. (300 psi + 0 psi + 0 psi = 300 psi; divide by 3 to get 100 psi.) With  this system, cylinder speed slows, but the only energy loss is the inefficiency  of the components used. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="239"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-27" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1127gif_00000055779.gif" height="309" width="237" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-27. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder extending at medium  speed.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;To get &lt;em&gt;mid speed&lt;/em&gt;, the directional valves shift as  indicated in Figure 11-27. By energizing solenoid &lt;em&gt;C2&lt;/em&gt; on the right-hand  3-way valve, an extra 3 gpm goes to the cylinder to give &lt;em&gt;mid&lt;/em&gt;  &lt;em&gt;speed&lt;/em&gt;. Note that the pump pressure rises to 200 psi as the cylinder  speed doubles. There still is only hardware inefficiency to waste energy, so the  system runs cool. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="275"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-28" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1128gif_00000055780.gif" height="308" width="273" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-28. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder extending at fast  speed.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;To make the cylinder stroke at &lt;em&gt;fast speed&lt;/em&gt;, shift the directional  valves as shown in Figure 11-28. By energizing solenoids &lt;em&gt;C1&lt;/em&gt; and  &lt;em&gt;C2&lt;/em&gt;, both 3-way valves shift to send all pump flow to the cylinder.  While the cylinder is in &lt;em&gt;fast speed&lt;/em&gt; mode, pump and cylinder pressure  are the same. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="256"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-29" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1129gif_00000055781.gif" height="337" width="252" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-29. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder retracting at fast  speed.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;To retract the cylinder at fast speed, shift solenoid &lt;em&gt;B1&lt;/em&gt;  along with &lt;em&gt;C1&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;C2&lt;/em&gt;, as shown in Figure 11-29. Energizing one  or more solenoids in the retract mode gives different speeds that are nearly the  same as when extending.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;If the flow divider had more and/or unequal-size motors, selection  of a combination of speeds by selecting different flow outputs is possible. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;This circuit is tamper-proof. To change the preset speeds, the  flow divider and/or pump must be changed. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: Any flow-divider circuit will intensify  pressure. In Figure 11-26, if the cylinder stalled, the pressure would continue  to rise. When the pump reached the relief valve setting, pressure at the  cylinder would be 3000 psi. Use a second pressure-relief valve between the flow  divider and the pump port of the cylinder directional valve to set a safe  pressure in case of cylinder stall.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;h2&gt;Speed control with motor-type flow dividers&lt;/h2&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 11-30 through 11-33 show a different type of motor-type flow-divider  circuit for variable speed. This circuit uses a smaller pump, electric motor,  and tank to give the same speed but less high-speed force. Notice there is a  3-gpm pump supplying one section of the flow divider. As the fed section of the  flow divider turns, the other two sections also turn and pump fluid directly  from the tank. Thus, in Figure 11-30, the two right-hand sections of the flow  divider are only circulating oil. All pump flow is going to the cylinder, which  is operating in slow-speed mode. In this condition, the cylinder is capable of  generating its highest tonnage. Notice that the cylinder requires 300 psi to  move it and the pump is showing 300 psi. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="257"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-30" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1130gif_00000055782.gif" height="334" width="255" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-30. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder extending at slow  speed.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;The cylinder speeds up when solenoid &lt;em&gt;C2&lt;/em&gt; on the left-hand  3-way valve is energized as in Figure 11-31. Now, one flow divider section sends  its oil to the cylinder along with pump flow. The cylinder goes to mid-speed  mode and pump pressure climbs to 600 psi. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="257"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-31" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1131gif_00000055783.gif" height="339" width="255" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-31. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder extending at medium  speed.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;To get full speed from the cylinder, solenoid &lt;em&gt;C1&lt;/em&gt; on the  right-hand 3-way valve is energized as shown in Figure 11-32. Now all three  sections of the flow divider feed the cylinder. The cylinder is at fast-speed  mode and pump pressure climbs to 900 psi. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="275"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-32" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1132gif_00000055784.gif" height="309" width="273" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-32. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder extending at fast  speed.)&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p&gt;If the pressure required to move the cylinder to the work is relatively low,  this circuit works well. There is enough flow to move rapidly at low pressure,  and enough pressure at low flow to do the work. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: The gears in standard motor-type flow dividers are  noisy. In the above two systems, the flow divider turns continuously. The noise  level may be unacceptable in low-noise areas. &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="257"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-33" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1133gif_00000055785.gif" height="340" width="255" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-33. Meter-in flow-control circuit with motor-type flow  divider to minimize heat generation. (Shown with cylinder retracting at fast  speed.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;h1&gt;Motor-type flow divider in full-time regeneration circuit&lt;/h1&gt; &lt;p&gt;Figures 11-34 through 11-44 picture a unique regeneration circuit using a  motor-type flow divider. Normally flow-divider circuits use the split flow to  synchronize actuator movement. This circuit uses a flow divider to intensify  flow for regeneration. This circuit works best on cylinders with small rods; and  gives exactly twice speed on double-rod cylinders and hydraulic motors.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="255"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-34" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1134gif_00000055786.gif" height="334" width="253" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-34. Full-time regeneration circuit using a motor-type  flow divider. (Shown at rest with pump running.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 11-34 shows the circuit in the at-rest condition.  Equal-outlet motor-type flow divider &lt;em&gt;C&lt;/em&gt; is piped between the cylinder  rod-end port and the directional valve. The flow divider’s normal inlet port  connects to the cylinder; one outlet connects to the directional valve; and the  other outlet is teed into the cylinder cap-end line.&lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="264"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-35" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1135gif_00000055787.gif" height="325" width="262" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-35. Full-time regeneration circuit using a motor-type  flow divider. (Shown with cylinder extending under regeneration.)&lt;/p&gt; &lt;hr noshade="noshade"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;&lt;/tbody&gt;&lt;/table&gt; &lt;p align="left"&gt;Figure 11-35 depicts solenoid &lt;em&gt;A1&lt;/em&gt;energized so that flow  from the pump goes past the teed-in flow divider line to the cylinder cap end.  As the cylinder extends, oil from the rod end enters the flow divider. The flow  divider splits this oil. Half goes to tank at 0 pressure and half goes to the  cylinder cap-end tee at pressure high enough to mix it with pump flow. As the  cylinder starts to extend, speed quickly increases to almost twice the original  speed. Maximum cylinder speed directly relates to the rod size: the larger the  rod, the slower the speed. With a double rod-end cylinder, speed exactly  doubles. As with any regeneration circuit, speed increases but force decreases.  &lt;/p&gt; &lt;table align="center" border="0" width="265"&gt; &lt;tbody&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="Fig 11-36" src="http://www.hydraulicspneumatics.com/Content/Site200/ebooks/01_01_2006/83804Fig1136gif_00000055788.gif" height="326" width="263" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt; &lt;tr&gt; &lt;td&gt; &lt;p align="center"&gt;Figure 11-36. Full-time regeneration circuit using a motor-type  flow divider. (Shown with cylinder retracting.)&lt;/
